Esther

Esther front

Introduction to Esther

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of Esther

1. King Ahasuerus sends away his wife, the queen (1:1–22)
2. Ahasuerus chooses Esther as the new queen (2:1–23)
3. Haman plots to destroy the Jews (3:1–15)
4. Mordecai asks Esther to help her people (4:1–17)
5. Esther pleads with the king for the Jews (5:1–7:10)
6. The result of Haman’s plot to destroy the Jews (8:1–9:16)
7. The Feast of Purim (9:17–32)
8. Conclusion (10:1–3)

What is the Book of Esther about?

The Book of Esther tells how a young Jewish woman named Esther became the queen of Persia. As queen, she worked to save all the Jews in the Persian Empire from being destroyed.

This book ends by telling why the Jews celebrate the festival of Purim. The name “Purim” comes from the word “pur,” which means “lots” or “dice.” Haman, the enemy of Jews, threw dice to choose when to attack and destroy the Jews. The Jews celebrate Purim to remember how Yahweh rescued his people from being destroyed.

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators can use the traditional title of this book, which is “The Book of Esther” or just “Esther.” Or they can choose a clearer title, such as “The Book About Esther.”

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What was the Persian Empire?

King Cyrus the Great conquered and ruled over many kingdoms. This was in the part of the world called Persia, which is now Iran. So people named his kingdom the Persian Empire. When Cyrus conquered Babylonia in 539 B.C., he then controlled the Jews whom the Babylonians had earlier taken into exile.

Why were there Jews in Babylonia when the Persians conquered it?

In 586 B.C., the Babylonians conquered and took into exile the people of Judah. These Jews and their descendants were still in Babylon when the Persians conquered it.

What was meant by “the laws of the Medes and Persians”?

The phrase “the laws of the Medes and Persians” is found in Esther 1:19 and Daniel 6:12. It referred to laws and decrees that could not be changed or removed once they were issued. In the book of Esther, the king made a decree that the people could attack the Jews. Later he regretted that decision but he was not able to change the decree.

The term “Medes” refers to a people group that had formed its own nation, but the Persians conquered them.

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

What different levels of language are in the Book of Esther?

In the Book of Esther, people talk to each other in many different situations. There is the polite and stately talk in the Persian court and the words of royal decrees. Friends and close relatives also talk to each other. There are even the words that one uses in speaking to oneself. Translators should use all the ways their own language has to express these different situations in a way that their readers will identify and understand.

Esther 1

Esther 1 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

The king’s divorce

The king’s advisers were afraid that husbands would lose their authority when they heard the queen had refused to come to show her beauty to the king’s guests, so the advisers told him to divorce her.

Esther 1:1

וַ⁠יְהִ֖י

In the Old Testament, this is a standard way of beginning a historical story. Many languages have similar story-opening formulas, and if your language has one, you can use it. But do not use it if it would suggest that the story is not real, only made up. Alternate translation: “this account happened” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

בִּ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ

The term day is used figuratively here to refer to a longer period of time. You could just say “during the reign of Ahasuerus,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “in the time of Ahasuerus” (See: Idiom)

אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ

This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה

This is background information to help the reader identify Ahasuerus. (See: Background Information)

ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙

Alternative translation: “This king named Ahasuerus ruled”

מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ

In case your audience might not know where these places are, you could say, “extending from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west.” (See: Background Information)

שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה

The number is given to show what a large empire this was. You could say that explicitly by saying, “Ahasuerus ruled a very large empire that had 127 provinces.” (See: Background Information)

שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה

Alternate translation: “one hundred twenty-seven provinces” (See: Numbers)

Esther 1:2

כְּ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת…עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

Here, the action of sitting on a throne is used figuratively to mean ruling over a kingdom. You could just say “ruled,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “ruled his empire from his royal throne” (See: Metonymy)

עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

Royalty is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with a verb by saying, “the throne he ruled from,” or use an adjective, “his royal throne.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֥ן

This was the name of a royal city of the Persian kings. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

הַ⁠בִּירָֽה

This means a castle or palace where a king would live. But since the city of Susa itself is being called a citadel here, it’s likely that the term figuratively means royal city or capital city. The person telling this story is identifying Susa as the capital by calling it by the name of something closely associated with it, the royal palace within it. A good translation might be “the capital city of Persia.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 1:3

בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ

This means that Ahasuerus had already ruled for two full years and that these events took place in the year that followed them. Alternate translation: “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled his empire” or “after he had ruled for two years” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ

Reign is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

עָשָׂ֣ה מִשְׁתֶּ֔ה

Alternative translation: “he hosted a feast”

חֵ֣יל ׀ פָּרַ֣ס וּ⁠מָדַ֗י

This likely refers to the leaders of the army. It is describing a part of the army by referring to the whole army. Alternate translation: “the officers of the army” (See: Synecdoche)

הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֛ים

This probably means something like “the wealthy landowners.”

לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו

Face figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so this phrase means “in his presence.” The invitation was to come to the royal capital to attend a banquet where the king would be present in person. You could say, as UST does, that the king was present in person to host the feast. Or you could say as an alternative, “all of them came to Susa for the feast” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 1:4

בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ אֶת־עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

You can translate the abstract noun with an emphasized adjective. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: Abstract Nouns)

בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ

He refers to the king. The implication is that he held this banquet to show all of his officials how wealthy and powerful he was. The invited officials would then go back to all the different parts of the empire and tell everyone this. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus wanted to demonstrate to his guests” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

The words wealth and glory have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize how great his kingdom was. Alternate translation: “the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: Doublet)

בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ…וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ

You can translate the abstract nouns splendor, beauty, and greatness as adjectives. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … that he was a very powerful king” (See: Abstract Nouns)

יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ

The words splendor and beauty have similar meaning and emphasize how great he was. Alternate translation: “the splendor of his greatness” (See: Doublet)

יָמִ֣ים רַבִּ֔ים שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם

This was a very long time for a royal feast to last. The earlier part of the verse provides the reason for this. To make the connection explicit, you could add some explanatory words to the verse like this: “Ahasuerus entertained his guests fabulously because he wanted to demonstrate that his empire was extremely wealthy and that he was a very powerful king. He did so many things for them that the festivities lasted for six months.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם

Six months is about 180 days or about half a year. You can use whatever expression will best express this time period in your language. (See: Numbers)

Esther 1:5

וּ⁠בִ⁠מְל֣וֹאת ׀ הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה

This implies “at the end of that feast.” You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after those 180 days were over” or “at the end of those six months” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עָשָׂ֣ה הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ…מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה

This was a second feast that the king hosted. He likely did this to thank the people who had worked so hard in hosting the first feast. You could say that explicitly. (See: Numbers)

בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֨ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֜ה

The expression in this case seems to refer specifically to the royal citadel from which the city got its name. This second feast would not have been for everyone in the entire city. It was specifically for the people who served the king in the citadel and who had worked so hard over the previous six months hosting the first feast. Alternate translation: “for every man who worked for him in the palace at Susa” (See: Translate Unknowns)

הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩

Here, found is an idiom that means could be found or were there. (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who worked for him in” (See: Active or Passive)

לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּ֧דוֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָ֛ן

The person telling this story is referring to the staff of the palace by speaking of two extreme parts of it, the most important and the least important people who worked there, in order to include everyone in between. You could just explain this meaning, as UST does. Alternate translation: “from the most important official to the least important servant” (See: Merism)

שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים

The story does not suggest that this was an unusually long time by saying, “for many days.” But you could also say something like “a whole week” to show that this was a generous gesture of thanks on the part of the king. Alternate translation: “another feast that lasted seven days”

Esther 1:6

ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת

These linens were curtains that were hung in the courtyard. Cotton refers to the white color of some of them. So this means white and blue curtains. (See: Translate Unknowns)

ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת

You can specify at the beginning of this verse that the location being described is the same as in the previous verse: “In the courtyard, white and blue curtains.”

בְּ⁠חַבְלֵי־ב֣וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן

Byssus means “white linen” and it is used to describe the white color of some of these cords. So this means white and purple cords. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִטּ֣וֹת ׀ זָהָ֣ב וָ⁠כֶ֗סֶף

You can specify that these couches were there for the guests to recline on while they ate. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

רִֽצְפַ֥ת

This word probably refers to a mosaic floor made of inlaid pieces of colorful precious stones. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בַּהַט

This is a kind of red and purple stone that contains pieces of crystal. You could call it “feldspar” or something descriptive like “red marble.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וָ⁠שֵׁ֖שׁ

This is a white precious stone. You could identify it as “alabaster.” Alternatively, while it is not exactly the same thing as marble, your readers would get the right idea if you called it “white marble.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠סֹחָֽרֶת

This word probably refers to a black marble that was used to create borders around mosaics. You could call this “black marble,” or you could just say that the floor contained “another precious stone.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 1:7

וְ⁠הַשְׁקוֹת֙

The abstract noun serving refers to how the drinks were served at the banquet. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “The attendants served wine.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠כֵלִ֖ים מִ⁠כֵּלִ֣ים שׁוֹנִ֑ים

This could mean that “no two of them were alike.” But you could also just say that the wine was served in “various kinds of golden cups.”

וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

This means that King Ahasuerus himself paid for all the wine that the guests drank at his seven-day feast in Susa, and the wine came from his personal supply. Alternate translation: “the king was very generous with the royal wine” or “the king showed a great willingness to give” or “the king provided all of it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

This probably means special fine wine that only the king could acquire and afford. You can translate the abstract noun royalty with an adjective. Alternate translation: “royal wine” (See: Abstract Nouns)

כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here, hand refers figuratively to the king himself, viewed through his action of giving. (See: Metonymy)

Esther 1:8

וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁתִיָּ֥ה כַ⁠דָּ֖ת

The abstract noun drinking refers here not to the action of drinking, but to the guidelines for serving drinks that the king had established for the banquet. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus had established this rule for all his household attendants who served the wine” (See: Abstract Nouns)

אֵ֣ין אֹנֵ֑ס

This could mean one of two things: (1) No one would be stopped from drinking even if the attendants thought they had already had enough. Alternate translation: “there was to be no restriction on drinking” (2) There would be no requirement to drink. Alternate translation: “no one must be forced to drink” Either way, this was another sign of the generosity that the king showed as he hosted this banquet to thank the people who worked for him. Either he was: (1) allowing them to drink as much as they wanted to, or (2) not requiring them to eat and drink everything that was served at a banquet as guests of the king would usually be expected to do. You could say explicitly at the beginning of the verse that the king was giving his guests a special privilege. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כִּי־כֵ֣ן ׀ יִסַּ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ עַ֚ל כָּל־רַ֣ב בֵּית֔⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ

This explains why no one had to drink if they did not want to. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can give this explanation (the reason) before the result that it accounts for, using a connecting word like “so.” You could say, “The king had established for every overseer of his house to do according to the desire of man by man, so the drinking was according to the law, ‘There is no compulsion.’” Alternate translation: “the king made the attendants who served the wine follow this rule” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ

Alternate translation: “the king wanted every guest to be able to drink as much as he wanted” or “all the guests could drink as little or as much as they wanted”

אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ

This is an idiom that means “everyone.” (See: Idiom)

Esther 1:9

גַּ֚ם

This introduces something else that was happening at the same time. You can indicate this by saying something like “during this time.” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה

You can explain that she was the wife of Ahasuerus by saying, “Queen Vashti, the king’s wife” or “his wife.” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה

This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next one. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה נָשִׁ֑ים

This could mean the women who served in the palace, the wives of the men who were officers and servants, or both. You could say, “a feast for the wives of the men who attended” or “for the women who worked in the palace.”

בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ

Alternate translation: “the royal palace where King Ahasuerus lived”

בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת

You can translate the abstract noun royalty with the adjective royal. Alternate translation: “royal palace” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 1:10

בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י

Alternate translation: “after six days” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

כְּ⁠ט֥וֹב לֵב־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בַּ⁠יָּ֑יִן

Here, heart figuratively means the action of thinking or feeling. Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was in a good mood from drinking wine” or “when the king was drunk with wine” (See: Idiom)

לִ֠⁠מְהוּמָן בִּזְּתָ֨א חַרְבוֹנָ֜א בִּגְתָ֤א וַ⁠אֲבַגְתָא֙ זֵתַ֣ר וְ⁠כַרְכַּ֔ס

These are names of seven men. (See: How to Translate Names)

הַ⁠סָּ֣רִיסִ֔ים

This term occurs a dozen times in the story. It describes male royal officials who served as guardians for the women who lived in the palace. They were both guardians of the door, to keep unwanted people out of the women’s quarters, and guardians of the women inside, to take care of them and look after their needs. (As we learn in 2:21, some of these officials also protected the king’s private quarters.) As we see here, and as will also be seen in 2:14 and 2:16, their duties included escorting women from place to place. The term likely indicates that, in keeping with the practices of the time, these men were castrated because their work brought them into such close contact with the king’s wives and concubines. If your language has a term for such an official and you think your readers would recognize it, you can use it. Otherwise, you can use a term that describes the role that these officials played in the royal court. Alternate translation: “guardians” or “officials” or “castrated servants” (See: Translate Unknowns)

הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ

This is background information to explain who these men were. Alternate translation: “who attended him personally” (See: Background Information)

אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that these seven men served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: Metonymy)

Esther 1:11

לְ֠⁠הָבִיא

This is the beginning of the instructions that King Ahasuerus gave to the seven eunuchs he summoned in verse 10. You can make this explicit by saying, “He told them to bring.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus wanted Queen Vashti to come personally into his presence. (See: Metonymy)

בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת

You can translate the abstract noun royalty with an adjective by saying, “wearing her royal crown.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת

Ahasuerus likely wanted Vashti to wear her queen’s crown so that everyone would know that she was his wife. You could say that explicitly. (For the possible reasons why he wanted them to know this, see the next note.) (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לְ⁠הַרְא֨וֹת הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ אֶת־יָפְיָ֔⁠הּ

Everything Ahasuerus did at his banquets was to show how rich and powerful he was. He seems to have believed that having a very beautiful wife was one more thing that proved he was a great man. So he wanted everyone to see how beautiful Vashti was. You can put this second in the verse, after explaining that Vashti was a very beautiful woman, because it accounts for what happens afterwards, when the king sends his seven personal servants to bring her in to his banquet. (See: Background Information)

הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙

This might mean “his guests, especially the officials.”

כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can place this first in the verse because it is the reason that explains everything else that happens afterward in the verse. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא

Alternate translation: “she was very beautiful” (See: Idiom)

Esther 1:12

וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙

You can put the events in chronological order and say first that the eunuchs told Vashti what the king had commanded and then say that she refused to come. (See: Order of Events)

וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙

If your language needs to give a reason why she refused, it is most likely because she did not want a group of drunken men staring at her lustfully. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Alternate translation: “at the king’s command” or “what the king wanted”

בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים

Here, hand refers figuratively to the eunuchs themselves, viewed through their action of telling Vashti what the king had commanded. Alternation translation: “when those servants told Queen Vashti what the king wanted” (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים

See how you translated this term in 1:10. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יִּקְצֹ֤ף הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ מְאֹ֔ד וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ

These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. You could combine them as UST does by saying, “The king became so angry that he could barely contain himself.” (See: Parallelism)

וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ

Here the story uses a metaphor that pictures the king’s anger as a fire that burned inside of him. If your language has a different word picture that it uses to describe extreme anger, you can use that here. If not, you can translate plainly, “his anger continued to increase.” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 1:13

לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים

This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”

יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים

This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”

כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men. (See: Background Information)

כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

You can place this first in the verse If your readers would misunderstand this to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י

Here, face refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with” (See: Metonymy)

יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין

This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.

Esther 1:14

וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו

Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”

כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן

These are the names of seven men. (See: How to Translate Names)

רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

To see the face of is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors. (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת

Here, sitting represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See:Metaphor)

Esther 1:15

כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים

This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כְּ⁠דָת֙…עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר

Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because…?”

בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים

To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do” (See: Order of Events)

בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים

Here, hand figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that the eunuchs were the ones who told Queen Vashti what King Ahasuerus had commanded her. (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים

See how you translated this term in 1:10. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 1:16

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מְמוּכָ֗ן לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Memukan was speaking in the presence of the king and of the other officials. Alternate translation: “then Memukan spoke so that both the king and the officials could hear” (See: Metonymy)

כָּל־הָ֣⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֕ר בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ

This means all the different people groups that were living in the empire. You could say, “all the people groups in all the provinces that King Ahasuerus rules” or more generally, “every person who lives in the entire empire of King Ahasuerus.” (See: Hyperbole)

מְמוּכָ֗ן

See how you translated this man’s name in 1:14. (See: How to Translate Names)

הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ

Memukan speaks of the king in third person as a form of respect. If you want to portray him as speaking primarily to the king because he is answering the king’s question, you could have him say, “in all the provinces that you rule” or “every person who lives in your entire empire.” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Esther 1:17

כִּֽי

This introduces the reason why Memukan says that Queen Vashti has done wrong against all the men in the kingdom and not only against King Ahasuerus. To show that, you can begin with “This is what will happen.” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּה֙ עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים

To emphasize his point, Memukan exaggerates and says that every single woman in the empire will hear about Queen Vashti refusing to obey King Ahasuerus. You could say, as UST does, that “women all over the empire” will hear about what the queen did. Or you could preserve Memukan’s manner of speaking by saying, “every woman” will hear. (See: Hyperbole)

לְ⁠הַבְז֥וֹת בַּעְלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ן

Here, eyes stand for seeing, and seeing figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that the women will treat their husbands with disrespect and not obey them. Alternate translation: “women will despise their husbands” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠אָמְרָ֗⁠ם הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה

The implication is that they will go on to say, “So if even the queen can disobey the king, why should I have to obey my husband?” If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה

The women will stop respecting their husbands after they hear about this. You can put this report about what Queen Vashti did first, before “women will stop respecting their husbands,” because it is the reason that explains that result. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means the Queen Vashti refused to come into the presence of King Ahasuerus when he summoned her during the feast. See how you translated this in verse 11. (See: Metonymy)

Esther 1:18

וְֽ⁠הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה

Alternate translation: “even today” or “even this very day”

שָׂר֣וֹת פָּֽרַס־וּ⁠מָדַ֗י

It becomes clear later in the verse that Memukan is speaking of the wives of the king’s officials, and you could communicate that here by saying, “the wives of the officials who govern Persia and Media.” But the term “noblewomen” indicates that they also had high status of their own, so you could also call them “the leading women of Persia and Media.”

דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה

Alternate translation: “what the queen has done”

תֹּאמַ֣רְנָה

This means that they will “talk back” or “disobey.” Alternate translation: “refuse to obey”

לְ⁠כֹ֖ל שָׂרֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

This means the husbands of the noblewomen. The implication may be, “They will disobey their husbands even though they are officials of the king.” You could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י בִּזָּי֥וֹן וָ⁠קָֽצֶף

This could mean either that they will treat their husbands with disrespect, and this will make their “husbands angry with them” or that “they will be angry with their husbands and treat them with contempt.”

וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י

This could mean that the husbands will be as furious “as much as they can bear.” But you could also say, “That will be bad enough by itself, even if the news does not spread any farther.” If you think that is the meaning, you can say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 1:19

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב

This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king.” (See: Idiom)

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב

Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it pleases you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that the decree will come from the king himself. Alternate translation: “you should personally issue a royal decree” or “you should write a decree yourself” (See: Metonymy)

דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙

You can translate the abstract noun royalty with the adjective “royal.” Alternate translation: “royal decree” (See: Abstract Nouns)

מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו

Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠יִכָּתֵ֛ב

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “you should write a decree yourself” or “command your scribes to write a decree” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֑וֹר

Alternate translation: “these laws never become invalid” or “can never be changed”

תָב֜וֹא…לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ

Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “never come into your presence again” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

תָב֜וֹא…לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Queen Vashti will never again come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “never again come before King Ahasuerus” (See: Metonymy)

וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ יִתֵּ֣ן הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠רְעוּתָ֖⁠הּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה

Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You can show the same meaning with a verb that addresses a singular “you” and indicates that Memukan is offering advice, not giving a command when he say, “choose another woman to be queen.” Alternate translation: “the king can give her position as queen to some other woman” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙

You can translate the abstract noun royalty with an expression such as “her royal position” or “her position as queen.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה

Memukan means that the next queen should be “better than” Vashti by obeying all of the king’s commands. You could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 1:20

וְ⁠נִשְׁמַע֩ פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when everyone … hears” (See: Active or Passive)

פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ

Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person: “When they hear what you have commanded.” Alternate translation: “when they hear the king’s decree” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אֲשֶֽׁר־יַעֲשֶׂה֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

Even though the decree of Ahasuerus applied only to Vashti directly, implicitly it meant that all wives had to obey their husbands or else their husbands could banish and divorce them as well. You can say this explicitly at the end of the verse by saying, “because if any wife disobeys her husband, he can banish and divorce her, just as you did to Vashti.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “for all your kingdom” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

כִּ֥י רַבָּ֖ה הִ֑יא

Alternate translation: “even though your empire is very large”

הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֗ים יִתְּנ֤וּ יְקָר֙ לְ⁠בַעְלֵי⁠הֶ֔ן

Alternate translation: “women will respect and obey their husbands”

לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּד֖וֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָֽן

This expression figuratively refers to all of the husbands in the empire. By naming both extremes, it includes everyone in between. You could just give the meaning, as UST does: “every husband in the empire.” Alternate translation: “this will be true for both the most important man and the least important man in the empire, and everyone in between” (See: Merism)

Esther 1:21

וַ⁠יִּיטַב֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

Like “if it is good to the king” in verse 19, this is an idiom that means the king thought this was a good idea or this advice pleased the king. (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֑ים

Here, eyes stand for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus and all the officials who heard Memukan’s advice thought that his suggestion was a good idea. (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר מְמוּכָֽן

This means that King Ahasuerus wrote a law proclaiming what Memukan had suggested.

מְמוּכָֽן

Translate his name as in 1:14. (See: How to Translate Names)

Esther 1:22

וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֤ח סְפָרִים֙ אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

He means King Ahasuerus. This is saying that the king sent letters to every province in his empire.

מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙

This is an idiom that means “every province” or every single province. (See: Idiom)

כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”

עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם

This is an idiom that means “every people group” or every single people group. (See: Idiom)

כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ

Here, tongue figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: Metonymy)

לִ⁠הְי֤וֹת כָּל־אִישׁ֙ שֹׂרֵ֣ר בְּ⁠בֵית֔⁠וֹ

This meant that all men should have complete authority over their wives and their children.

כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ

Here, tongue figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. (See: Metonymy)

כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ

The implication is that the husband ought to be able to give orders to his wife in his own native language and that she should understand and obey him, even if she had to learn his language to do so. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 2

Esther 2 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Esther becomes queen

Esther was humble and took the advice of the royal officials about how to dress for her time with the king. The king chose Esther to be the new queen.

Mordecai warns the king against a plot

Esther’s cousin, Mordecai, discovered that two men planned to kill the king. He told Esther, who then told the king. She also gave Mordecai credit for telling her.

Esther 2:1

אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה

This introduces a new event that happened some time later, but we do not know how much later. You can show this with a phrase like “After some time had passed.” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

כְּ⁠שֹׁ֕ךְ חֲמַ֖ת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ

Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was not angry any more” or “when King Ahasuerus became less angry”

זָכַ֤ר אֶת־וַשְׁתִּי֙

This means that he started to think about Vashti. He probably thought about the things that he liked about her, meaning that he missed her.

אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ

This refers to Vashti’s refusal to obey Ahasuerus, and to the decision he made in 1:21 that she could never come into his presence again. This could actually mean that when he thought about Vashti and what she had done, he regretted the decision that he had made about her. But there was nothing he could do to bring her back because the laws of the empire could not be changed. You could explain all or some of this in your translation, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ

You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 2:2

נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו

These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in 1:13, but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants. (See: Translate Unknowns)

יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת

Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ

Them refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you can say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ

The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language (See: First, Second or Third Person)

טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה

As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: Idiom)

Esther 2:3

וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ

The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way (See: First, Second or Third Person)

טוֹבַ֨ת מַרְאֶ֜ה

As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: Idiom)

שׁוּשַׁ֤ן הַ⁠בִּירָה֙

In this context, this expression probably means “to the palace here in Susa.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים

This means the harem for virgins, the place where the young women would live and receive beauty treatments before they were taken to the king (see verses 13 and 14).

אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “let Hegai, the king’s official, who is in charge of the women, take care of them” (See: Active or Passive)

יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א

Here, hand is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Hegai” (See: Metaphor)

הֵגֶ֛א

This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your eunuch” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

סְרִ֥יס

See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the official of” or “the administrator of” (See: Translate Unknowns)

שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים

Alternate translation: “who is in charge of the women who live there.”

תַּמְרוּקֵי⁠הֶֽן

This term seems to refer to a specific substance that women would put on their face or other parts of their body to make themselves more beautiful. From verse 12, it appears to mean lotions that were used along with oils and perfumes. But here, this one aspect of a woman’s beauty treatment seems to be used to refer to all of it, so you could call these “beauty treatments.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 2:4

וְ⁠הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תִּיטַב֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying something such as “the young woman you like the best.” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י

Here, eyes figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus could decide which young woman he liked the best and make her queen. (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

Here, eyes have the same figurative meaning. The phrase indicates that King Ahasuerus thought that this suggestion was a good idea. Alternate translation: “The king found their suggestion appealing” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ כֵּֽן

Alternate translation: “so he followed the suggestion”

Esther 2:5

אִ֣ישׁ יְהוּדִ֔י

This introduces Mordecai as a new character in the story. Use your language’s way of introducing a new character. This expression means a Jewish man. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה

Here the phrase likely indicates the city rather than the palace, that is, the capital city of Susa. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מָרְדֳּכַ֗י

This is a man’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

בֶּ֣ן יָאִ֧יר בֶּן־שִׁמְעִ֛י בֶּן־קִ֖ישׁ

These are men’s names. Jair, Shimei, and Kish are Mordecai’s male ancestors. You could say, “Mordecai was the son of Jair, who was the son of Shimei, who was the son of Kish,” or see the UST. (See: How to Translate Names)

אִ֥ישׁ יְמִינִֽי

While this likely refers to Kish, it is necessarily also true of Mordecai, and you could put it second in the verse. That way Mordecai’s nationality would come first, then his tribe, and then his family and clan. Alternate translation: “from the tribe of Benjamin”

Esther 2:6

אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם עִם־הַ⁠גֹּלָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הָגְלְתָ֔ה עִ֖ם יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל

The story now tells about something that happened many years before. This is background information that explains how this Jewish family came to live in Susa. You can introduce this by saying something like, “Many years earlier.” (See: Background Information)

אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon had taken Kish away from Jerusalem along with some other captives” (See: Active or Passive)

אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם

You can bring this information forward from later in the verse because it provides background information that helps identify Mordecai. (See: Background Information)

אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought the people that he took away from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “had taken Kish away from Jerusalem … and brought him to Babylon.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עִ֖ם

This means that the two things happened at the same time. You can indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time that he took.” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה

In the historical passage where this event is described (2 Kings 24:8–17), this king is called Jehoiachin. That was another name by which he was known. You can call him Jehoiachin here in Esther if you think that would help your readers recognize him better. (See: How to Translate Names)

אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל

You can say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought this king when he took him away from Jerusalem. For example, you can say, “Nebuchadnezzar … took King Jehoiachin of Judah away from Jerusalem and brought him to Babylon.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Esther 2:7

וַ⁠יְהִ֨י

The story now returns to talking about Mordecai. If it is helpful for your readers, you can specify his name, saying, “Now, Mordecai.”

בַּת־דֹּד֔⁠וֹ

If your language has a specific term for this relationship, you can use it. For example, you can say, “his cousin.” Alternate translation: “his uncle’s daughter”

הֲדַסָּ֗ה הִ֤יא אֶסְתֵּר֙

Here the story is indicating that this woman’s Hebrew name was Hadassah and her Persian name was Esther. You could say that explicitly. (See: How to Translate Names)

אֶסְתֵּר֙

This is a woman’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

אֵ֥ין לָ֖⁠הּ אָ֣ב וָ⁠אֵ֑ם

You could say simply that “she was an orphan,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “both her father and mother had died”

וְ⁠הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֤ה יְפַת־תֹּ֨אַר֙ וְ⁠טוֹבַ֣ת מַרְאֶ֔ה

These two phrases mean something similar. Separately, they could be saying that Esther was both sexually mature and very attractive. But taken together, they mean that, overall, she was very pleasant to look at. You could combine them, as UST does, and say that she was “exceptionally attractive” Alternate translation: “she had a lovely body and a beautiful face” (See: Parallelism)

וּ⁠בְ⁠מ֤וֹת אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ וְ⁠אִמָּ֔⁠הּ לְקָחָ֧⁠הּ מָרְדֳּכַ֛י ל֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַֽת

This is background information explaining the relationship between Mordecai and Esther. You can move it to right after the place where Esther is introduced by name because it describes what happened in the past, before Esther became a beautiful young woman. Alternate translation: “after her father and her mother had died, Mordecai had adopted her as his own daughter” (See: Background Information)

Esther 2:8

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י

After providing this background information about Mordecai and Esther in verses 5–7, the story now tells what happened as a result of these facts, when the provincial officers described in verse 3 began sending young women to the harem. That is, the story tells what happened to Esther because her family was living in the Persian empire and she was very attractive. Use your language’s way of showing that the events are now moving forward after giving background information. Alternate translation: “and so this is what happened” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת

This indicates that two actions took place at the same time. You should indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time.” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “when the messengers proclaimed the king’s decree and the scribes published the king’s law.” (See: Active or Passive)

דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

This refers to King Ahasuerus banishing Queen Vashti from his presence.

וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ

This refers to King Ahasuerus commanding that men would have complete authority over their wives.

בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע

You could also say where they did this action. Alternate translation: “Messengers went throughout the empire and proclaimed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. See the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

שׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֖ה

Here again, this likely means “the capital city of Susa.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֶל־יַ֣ד הֵגָ֑י

Here, hand is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. You could say that the officers “put them under the custody of Hegai” or that “Hegai began to take care of them.” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע…וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ…וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח

This means that Esther was brought to the harem of King Ahaserus at the same time as other young women were also being brought to the harem. You can say, “they brought Esther at the same time” or “they also brought Esther.” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they brought Esther” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח

You can explain why this happened. For example, you can say, “Because Esther was exceptionally attractive, the officers also brought her” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Alternate translation: “the king’s palace”

אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגַ֖י שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים

As earlier in this verse, this means under the custody of Hegai or that Hegai also began to take care of her. (See: Metaphor)

שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים

This means that Hegai took care of the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could move this information to earlier in the verse when Hegai is first mentioned because it explains why the young women were brought to him. (See: Background Information)

Esther 2:9

וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒

This means that Hegai found Esther attractive, and she obtained kindness from him or that Hegai was very impressed with Esther, and she won his favor. In other words, because he was so impressed with her, this made him want to do everything he could to help her. This is background information that explains why Hegai took the actions that are listed next.

וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮

Here, eyes figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that Hegai thought that Esther was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה

This means Esther. You should make sure that this is clear in your translation.

בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮

Here, his refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.

וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. To say that she “lifted kindness before his face” is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, it could even suggest that Esther and Hegai became friends. Alternate translation: “she won his favor” (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒

Here, his refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.

תַּמְרוּקֶ֤י⁠הָ

Alternate translation: “her beauty treatments,” as in 2:3. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מָנוֹתֶ֨⁠הָ֙

In context, this likely means that Hegai made sure that Esther was served good food that would keep her healthy.

שֶׁ֣בַע הַ⁠נְּעָר֔וֹת הָ⁠רְאֻי֥וֹת לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֖⁠הּ מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

This means that Hegai chose seven female servants from the king’s palace and assigned them to take care of Esther.

וַ⁠יְשַׁנֶּ֧⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתֶ֛י⁠הָ

Her means Esther, and her young women means the female attendants Hegai assigned to her.

Esther 2:10

לֹא־הִגִּ֣ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ

This means that Esther had not told anyone this information about herself.

אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ

These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does, and say something like “what people group she was from.” Alternate translation: “Esther did not tell anyone that she was a Jew, and she did not tell anyone who her relatives were” (See: Doublet)

כִּ֧י מָרְדֳּכַ֛י צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ

This is background information that explains why Esther did not tell anyone about her family or nationality. It might be helpful to your readers to state this at the beginning of the verse. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ

This means that Mordecai had gotten her to promise not to do it.

Esther 2:11

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם

Alternate translation: “every single day” (See: Idiom)

מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ

Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”

לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר

Here, face figuratively means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.” (See: Metonymy)

בֵּית־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים

Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”

לָ⁠דַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ

This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. You can place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said, If your readers would misunderstand this. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר

Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”

שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ

These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.” (See: Parallelism)

Esther 2:12

וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ

Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.” (See: Background Information)

נַעֲרָ֨ה וְ⁠נַעֲרָ֜ה

Alternate translation: “each one of the young women” (See: Idiom)

וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ תֹּר֩…לָ⁠ב֣וֹא ׀ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ

Each of these young women was going to have sexual relations with the king and, as a result, legally become one of his concubines, that is, one of his secondary wives. As the story has already explained, he would then choose one of them to become his queen and primary wife. But the king would still provide for each of the concubines for the rest of her life; they would not be free to marry anyone else. This is something that the story’s original audience would have understood implicitly. You can say it explicitly if your readers need this information to understand the story: “Each young woman in the harem, one at a time, was going to have sexual relations with King Ahasuerus and become one of his concubines” or “one of his secondary wives.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כְּ⁠דָ֤ת הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙

Here, law probably does not mean a legal decree, but rather a standard regimen that had been developed. (See: Translate Unknowns)

כִּ֛י כֵּ֥ן יִמְלְא֖וּ יְמֵ֣י מְרוּקֵי⁠הֶ֑ן

This phrase indicates that the story is now going to provide background information on how these treatments were done. It means, “This is how these women would spend the time preparing to go to the king.” (See: Background Information)

שִׁשָּׁ֤ה חֳדָשִׁים֙ בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר

This means that a woman’s attendants would rub her body with olive oil mixed with myrrh every day for six months. You can explain this in more detail if your readers need this information to understand the story. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר

This likely means “olive oil mixed with myrrh.”

וּ⁠בְ⁠תַמְרוּקֵ֖י הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים

This means lotions designed for women. In 2:3 and 2:9, this one specific part of the program seems to be used figuratively to mean all of it, and so in those verses it can be translated “beauty treatments.” But it should be translated with a specific term or phrase here, such as “women’s lotions” or “feminine ointments” because it is named along with oils and perfumes as one component of the treatment. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 2:13

וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה

Alternate translation: “after a woman’s year of beauty treatments was completed”

הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙

Anything most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted” (See: Active or Passive)

בֵּ֥ית

Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”

בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”

Esther 2:14

הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה

She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in 1:11. You can say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה

It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בֵּ֤ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ שֵׁנִ֔י

Alternate translations: “a different house for women” or “the harem for concubines” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים

Alternate translation: “where Shaashgaz, the king’s servant in charge of the concubines, would take care of her”

אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים

Here, hand is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. Just as Hegai was the overseer of the virgins, Shaashgaz was the overseer of the concubines, so he would be the one responsible for Esther while she was in the harem for concubines. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Shaashgaz” (See: Metaphor)

שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז

This is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

See how you translated this term, eunuch, in 1:10. You could say “royal” rather than “of the king.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים

This means that Shaashgaz was the official who took care of the concubines or who was responsible for the concubines.

הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים

As a concubine, the young woman was one of the king’s secondary wives. She would live in this harem for the rest of her life. She was not free to return to her family or to marry anybody else. If it would help your readers to understand the story, you could explain all or part of this to your readers here, if you did not do so in 2:12 or 2:13. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לֹא־תָב֥וֹא עוֹד֙ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

In verse 12, the Note mentioned that “go to the king” meant “have sexual relations with the king.” But for this occurrence of the expression, it is appropriate to use a more general phrase such as “visit the king” because there could be other, more social reasons for a further visit. The woman would now be a secondary wife, and the king would only send for her if he decided that he enjoyed being with her. Alternate translation: “She would not go and see the king again”

חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ

This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”

וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם

You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 2:15

וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר…לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12-14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת

This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

אֲבִיחַ֣יִל

This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. (See: How to Translate Names)

לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י

You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except” (See: Double Negatives)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י

Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”

אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י

As the king’s personal servant, Hegai would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you can make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים

This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

See how you decided to translate the term eunuch in 1:10. You could say “royal” for “of the king.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ

This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her” (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י

Here, eyes is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of” (See: Metaphor)

כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ

This phrase can mean either every man or every person who saw her. Alternate translation: “every man who saw her” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Esther 2:16

וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֨ח אֶסְתֵּ֜ר

You can say this with an active form by saying, for example, “The king’s servants brought Esther.” (See: Active or Passive)

אֶל־בֵּ֣ית מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ

You can use an adjective to translate the abstract noun royalty. For example, you can say, “in his royal palace” (See: Abstract Nouns)

בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֖י

Alternate translation: “in month ten” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת

Tebeth is the name of the tenth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “that is, the month of Tebeth” (See: Hebrew Months)

חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת

The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court. But for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given.

חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת

You could convert the Hebrew days and months into approximate dates on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to provide the Hebrew days and months. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠מַלְכוּתֽ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Esther 2:17

וַ⁠יֶּאֱהַ֨ב הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֶת־אֶסְתֵּר֙ מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠בְּתוּלֹ֑ת

These two phrases mean almost the same thing. The information is given twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Ahasuerus was completely convinced that Esther was the one he should make his queen. “More than all the virgins” basically duplicates the meaning of “more than all the women,” so, if this duplication would be confusing in your language, you don’t need to include both phrases, or you could say, “more than all of them” for the second phrase. (See: Parallelism)

מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים

This means all the other women who had been brought to the king and who became his concubines. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו

This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. See how you translated similar phrases in 2:9 and 2:15. Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus was very impressed with both Esther’s appearance and her personality. (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו

Favor and kindness mean similar things and are probably used together here to strengthen a single idea. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased with her” (See: Doublet)

לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠יָּ֤שֶׂם כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ בְּ⁠רֹאשָׁ֔⁠הּ

Ahasuerus did this to show that he was making Esther his queen. (See: Symbolic Action)

כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙

To translate the abstract noun royalty, you can use an adjective such as a “royal” crown. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 2:18

וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה גָד֗וֹל

The king did this to celebrate Esther becoming the queen. You can say this explicitly. For example, you can say, “Then, to celebrate her becoming the queen, the king hosted a great feast.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה אֶסְתֵּ֑ר

You could indicate to your readers this is the name that Ahasuerus gave to the feast, for example, “He called it ‘Esther’s Feast.’” (See: How to Translate Names)

וַ⁠הֲנָחָ֤ה לַ⁠מְּדִינוֹת֙ עָשָׂ֔ה

This was probably a “tax holiday,” that is, a temporary elimination of taxes. For a time, the provinces did not have to send in the usual taxes to the king. You could say something like “he proclaimed a temporary reprieve from taxes for all the provinces of his empire.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here, hand figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus personally gave lavish gifts to the guests at this feast. You could say something like “with royal generosity” or “with great willingness to give” or “with generosity that only a king can give.” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 2:19

וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית

Since this happened some time after Esther’s Feast, you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית

The most likely explanation for this is that Ahasuerus decided he would like to have more concubines. You can say this explicitly if it will help the readers to understand the story. He probably believed that having a large number of concubines was another thing that would show he was a great king. To do so, you could add: “because Ahasuerus decided that he would like to have more concubines.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “at the time when the king’s officers were gathering virgins for a second time.” (See: Active or Passive)

וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י

This indicates that the information about Mordecai explains what he was doing at this same time. You can use a phrase such as “during this time” to indicate this. (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֥ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Possible meanings are: (1) Sitting at the king’s gate is an idiom meaning that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. (See: Idiom) (2) Mordecai sat there so he could hear about how Esther was doing from the many people who passed through the gate.

בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s house” or “the gate to the king’s palace”

Esther 2:20

מֽוֹלַדְתָּ⁠הּ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עַמָּ֔⁠הּ

These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does. Alternate translation: “who her relatives were or that she was a Jew” (See: Doublet)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

Alternate translation: “just as Mordecai had instructed her” or “as Mordecai had made her promise” or “because Mordecai had warned her not to tell anyone”

Esther 2:21

בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֔ם

This resumes the story after the background information that is provided in verse 20. Indicate this in the way that your language resumes a story after giving background information, such as with a connecting phrase like “during that time.” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

It is implicit in the story that Mordecai heard the two men talking who are named right afterwards. You can say this explicitly if it helps the readers to understand this part of the story. To do so, add: “he heard two men talking.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

As in verse 19, this is likely an idiom that means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate where officials met to make important decisions. (See: Idiom)

בִּגְתָ֨ן וָ⁠תֶ֜רֶשׁ

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

שְׁנֵֽי־סָרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

See how you translated this term in 1:10. For the phrase of the king, you can say “royal.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֣י הַ⁠סַּ֔ף

In this case the men were not guardians of one of the harems but guardians of the king’s private rooms. You could say, “they guarded the doorway to the king’s private rooms” or “they protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters.”

וַ⁠יְבַקְשׁוּ֙

Here, seeking figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they were plotting” or “they wanted to find a way” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד

Here the expression to stretch out a hand means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. You could say, “they were planning to assassinate him.” (See: Idiom)

Esther 2:22

וַ⁠יִּוָּדַ֤ע הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֔י

You can say this with an active form, for example by saying, “Mordecai found out what they were planning.” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠יַּגֵּ֖ד לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה

This means that he told Queen Esther about it somehow.

בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי

This expression means that Esther passed the information along to King Ahasuerus on Mordecai’s behalf or that she told the king the information had come from Mordecai. (See: Idiom)

Esther 2:23

וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ

This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: Active or Passive)

עֵ֑ץ

This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or “wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים

This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: Idiom)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here, face refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 3

Esther 3 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Haman plots against the Jews

Mordecai was told to prostrate himself before Haman. This would be considered to be worship. But for a Jew, it was wrong to worship someone other than Yahweh. Because of this, he refused to do it. This made Haman angry, so he decided to kill all the Jews in the Persian Empire. Haman was a descendant of Agag, a king of the Amalekite people. The Amalekites became the enemies of the Jews during the exodus (Exodus 17:8-16). Moses told the people that they would need to destroy them (Deuteronomy 25:17-19), and later God commanded Saul to destroy them (1 Samuel 15:2-3). Samuel killed King Agag (1 Samuel 15:33), but the Amalekites were never completely destroyed (1 Samuel 30:17). Both Mordecai and Haman were probably very aware that their people were enemies.

Esther 3:1

אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה

This introduces a new event in the story. Use a connecting phrase that introduces a new event in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה

This event happened some time after Esther became queen, and you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

הָמָ֧ן

This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י

These are the names of Haman’s father and Haman’s people group. (See: How to Translate Names)

גִּדַּל֩…אֲחַשְׁוֵר֜וֹשׁ אֶת־הָמָ֧ן

This means that Ahasuerus promoted Haman. It’s implied in the story that Haman was already one of Ahasuerus’s officials, but that he was now being promoted to a higher position. You could say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם֙ אֶת־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים

These two phrases mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that the king was making Haman very powerful. You could combine them and say something like, “the king gave Haman a very high position that was over all of his other officials.” (See: Doublet)

וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ

Here, lifting is a metaphor meaning to advance or promote a person to a higher, more important position than they held previously. Alternate translation: “he gave him a more important position” (See: Metaphor)

כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ

Here, seat of authority means Haman’s position or status in the Persian government. (See: Idiom)

כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word authority, you could express the same idea with a concrete noun for this whole phrase. For example, you can say, “his position.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר אִתּֽ⁠וֹ

Him in this phrase may refer to the king. You could say that “the king promoted him above his other officials” or “gave him more authority than all of his other officials” or that “Haman became more important than all of his other officials.”

Esther 3:2

וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

Here, the gate of the king, probably the entrance to the citadel, may figuratively represent the citadel itself, the place where these people served the king. The citadel, in turn, would represent everyone who served the king. So you could say just “all the king’s other servants.” However, this may also be a reference to the specific group of officials who were stationed at the gate, the way Mordecai was. Alternate translation: “the royal officials who were stationed at the palace gate” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ…כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ לְ⁠הָמָ֔ן

The servants were required to do this as a way of honoring him whenever Haman walked by. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙

This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government. (See: Symbolic Action)

כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground” (See: Doublet)

וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙

This means bowing down all the way to the ground.

כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ

The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: Parallelism)

וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה

It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. You can say this explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 3:3

עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

See how you translated this expression at the beginning of 3:2.

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ…לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. You can say this explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. You can say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”

Esther 3:4

ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙

This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. You can say that explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם

This expression means “every day.” (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠יְהִ֗י ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙…וְ⁠לֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם

Here, he did not listen means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down. (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠הָמָ֗ן לִ⁠רְאוֹת֙ הֲ⁠יַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י

In this context, standing figuratively means to survive a challenge, and words means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it. (See: Idiom)

כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי

This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי

Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. You could say that explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 3:5

וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן

Here, seeing figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this. (See: Metaphor)

אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑⁠וֹ

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: Parallelism)

וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה

Here, Haman’s rage is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry. (See: Metaphor)

Esther 3:6

וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו

Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. You could say that explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז

Despise in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.

בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו

Here, eyes stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְ⁠בַדּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”

לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙

As in 2:21, the expression to stretch out a hand means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. (See: Idiom)

כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥ידוּ ל֖⁠וֹ אֶת־עַ֣ם מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

They means the other royal officials. Him refers to Haman. The people of Mordecai means the Jews. Mordecai had told these officials that he would not bow down to Haman because Jews worshiped only God. So this means that the other officials had told Haman that Mordecai was not bowing down to him because he was a Jew.

וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֣שׁ הָמָ֗ן לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֧יד

Here, seeking figuratively means trying to do something. In this context, it means that Haman decided that he would try to kill all the Jews. (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכ֥וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֖וֹשׁ

This means in the entire empire that King Ahasuerus ruled.

הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים…עַ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי

These two phrases refer to the same group of people. The repetition emphasizes how great the threat was to their existence. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “all of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai’s people, the Jews” (See: Doublet)

Esther 3:7

בַּ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙

Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן

Nisan is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: Hebrew Months)

חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן

As in 2:16, you could convert the Hebrew month into an approximate time on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to give the Hebrew month. (See: Translate Unknowns)

בִּ⁠שְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֔ה לַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ

Alternate translations: “during the twelfth year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” or “when King Ahasuerus had reigned for about twelve years” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל

The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. (See: How to Translate Names)

הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל

A lot was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen. (See: Translate Unknowns)

הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.” (See: Active or Passive)

הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched” (See: Metonymy)

מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ

This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.

מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ

Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. You can say that explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר

Adar is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: Hebrew Months)

שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר

See how you decided in 2:16 and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.

שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר

This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. You can say that explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר

Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Esther 3:8

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ

The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יֶשְׁנ֣⁠וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד

He refers to the king, and one people refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people. (See: Numbers)

מְפֻזָּ֤ר וּ⁠מְפֹרָד֙

These two words mean almost the same thing. Haman uses the repetition to emphasize that the Jews are everywhere throughout the empire and so their influence, which he says is bad, will affect everyone. You could combine these words as UST does. (See: Doublet)

בֵּ֣ין הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל מְדִינ֣וֹת מַלְכוּתֶ֑⁠ךָ

Haman is saying that the Jews are mixed in with all the other peoples, and they live in every province.

וְ⁠דָתֵי⁠הֶ֞ם שֹׁנ֣וֹת מִ⁠כָּל־עָ֗ם וְ⁠אֶת־דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֵינָ֣⁠ם עֹשִׂ֔ים

Haman is saying that the Jews have their own set of laws, and he is accusing them of not obeying the king’s laws as a result.

דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could have him say, “your laws.” Or you could indicate this respect another way by having Haman begin by saying, “Your Majesty.” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֵין־שֹׁוֶ֖ה לְ⁠הַנִּיחָֽ⁠ם

Haman is saying, “It is not good for you to allow them to live in your empire.” This can also be stated without the negative. Alternate translation: “the king should remove them” or “you should remove them”

וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying, “not good for you.” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Esther 3:9

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב

Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב

See how you decided to translate this idiom in 1:19. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” or “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king” (See: Idiom)

יִכָּתֵ֖ב

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who would do the action. For example, you can say, “the king could write a decree” or “you could write a decree.” (See: Active or Passive)

לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם

This means that the decree would say that all the Jews should be killed.

אֶשְׁקוֹל֙ עַל־יְדֵי֙ עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה

This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) Haman could mean that the king’s men will be able to collect a huge amount of money from the plunder that they would get from the Jews. Referring to the weight would be a way of saying, “I guarantee that it will be at least that much.” This reasoning agrees with 3:13, where the king’s letter specifies that those who kill the Jews can take their plunder. Alternate translation: “we will get so much plunder that the officers you send will be able to bring back” (Also see UST) (2) “Weigh out into the hands” could be an idiom that means Haman himself will pay the officers who will put the plan into effect. Haman will not do this personally, but it means that he will take responsibility for paying them from his own resources. Alternate translation: “From my own resources I will pay … to the men who do the work” (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף

This would be worth over $300 million at current prices today. But since prices vary over time, if you expressed the value in modern measurements, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate. Instead you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the talent, and explain in a note that a talent was equivalent to about 30 kilograms. Alternatively, you could specify the weight of the silver in the text, as UST does in metric tons. (See: Biblical Money)

וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף

The talent was the largest unit of money and 10,000 was the largest number in the counting system of the time. It is possible that Haman used these terms to represent a very large, but not precise, amount. Alternate translation: “a huge amount of silver” or “enormous amounts of silver” (See: Hyperbole)

עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה

This could mean: (1) those who work for the king in general (administrators) or (2) more specifically the officers whom Ahasuerus would send around the empire to organize the killing of the Jews.

גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could also have him speak of “your royal treasuries.” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Esther 3:10

וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן

The implication is that Ahasuerus thought that Haman’s suggestion was a good idea and he agreed to it. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king agreed that this was a good idea, so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן

Giving the ring to Haman showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it” (See: Symbolic Action)

טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ

This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י

This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.

צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים

This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

Esther 3:11

הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ

You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury. (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ

Here, eyes figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that he can do whatever he wants to the Jews. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 3:12

וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ

You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes” (See: Active or Passive)

בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒

You can add “of that same year” to show that Haman did this right after Ahasuerus agreed to his plan. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the first month” (See: Hebrew Months)

בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒

You can put this information first because it places the event within the timeline of the story.

וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה הָמָ֡ן

You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Haman dictated a letter to them” or “they wrote a decree containing all that Haman had commanded” (See: Active or Passive)

אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵֽי־הַ֠⁠מֶּלֶךְ

This seems to mean the officials of the king who served in the palace in the capital city, since they are distinguished from the provincial governors and the leaders of the people groups. (See: Translate Unknowns)

מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה

This expression means every province. See how you translated this in 1:22. (See: Idiom)

שָׂ֤רֵי עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם

Alternate translation: “the leaders of each people group”

עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם

This expression means every people group. See how you translated this in 1:22. (See: Idiom)

מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ

See how you translated this in 1:22. Alternate translation: “to each province using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script” (See: Idiom)

מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ

The implication is that the scribes translated the letter and sent it to each province using its own alphabet. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ

See how you translated this expression in 1:22. Alternate translation: “and to each people group in its own language” (See: Idiom)

כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ

Here, tongue is a metonym meaning the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “according to its language” (See: Metonymy)

בְּ⁠שֵׁ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹשׁ֙ נִכְתָּ֔ב

There are two This could mean: (1) Here, name could mean the authority of the king. This would be saying that Haman’s letter had the same authority as it would have had if the king had sent it himself. Alternate translation: “Haman sent the letter under the king’s own authority” (2) However, this could also mean that Haman actually had the scribes sign the king’s name to the letter. Alternate translation: “they signed the king’s name at the end of the letters” (See: Metaphor)

נִכְתָּ֔ב וְ⁠נֶחְתָּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to show that he was sending the letter under the king’s own authority, Haman sealed each copy of the letter with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it,” or “the scribes signed the king’s name at the end of the letters. Then they sealed the letters with wax, and stamped the wax by using the king’s ring” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 3:13

וְ⁠נִשְׁל֨וֹחַ סְפָרִ֜ים

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “couriers delivered the letters.” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הָ⁠רָצִים֮

Here, hand could mean two different things: (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the couriers carried the letters in their hands. Alternate translation: “couriers hand-delivered the documents” (2) “Hand” could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that couriers were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers gave the documents directly” (See: Metaphor)

אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒

Haman did not send the letters to the provinces (the geographical territories) themselves. Rather, he sent them to the officials in every province in the empire. The story is using the word “province” to refer figuratively to these officials by something associated with them, the territories they ruled. Your translation should make clear that the letters were sent to people, not places. (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֡יד לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֣ד

These words mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is envisioned. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “completely destroy.” (A “doublet” can use more than two words. See: Doublet)

מִ⁠נַּ֨עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֜ן

This is a figure of speech that figuratively describes all of something by naming two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. You could express its meaning as UST does and say something like “every single one of them.” Alternate translation: “including young people and old people” (See: Merism)

טַ֤ף וְ⁠נָשִׁים֙

Alternate translation: “including the children and the women”

בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד

Alternate translation: “on a single day” (See: Numbers)

בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר

Implicitly, this means “the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that same year.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר

Alternate translation: “on day thirteen” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר

Alternate translation: “of month twelve” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר

This is the name of the twelfth month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you decided in 2:16 and 3:7 to express dates that the story gives according to the Hebrew calendar. (See: Hebrew Months)

וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז

This means that the letters also said that those who killed the Jews could take everything that belonged to them.

Esther 3:14

הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה

You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “The officials in every province presented a copy of the letter as the law.” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה

This expression means each and every province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב…גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֑ים

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to post copies where everyone could see them” or “the king commanded the officials to display copies of these letters where all the people could see them” (See: Active or Passive)

לִ⁠הְי֥וֹת עֲתִדִ֖ים לַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה

Alternate translations: “so that people would be ready to do on that day what the king had written in the letter” or “so that they would get ready to do what the letter said to do when the day came”

Esther 3:15

הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

This means that the king had commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible.

הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

You can state explicitly where the couriers brought the letters. Alternate translation: “as the king had commanded, couriers rushed the letters to every province in the empire” or “then, according to what the king commanded, men riding horses took these letters quickly to every province in the empire” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “People read the letter out loud” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה

Here this likely means in the “capital city of Susa.” (See: Translate Unknowns)

יָשְׁב֣וּ לִ⁠שְׁתּ֔וֹת

(1) This could mean that Ahasuerus and Haman had more than just a drink together. This could be a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. They may have celebrated with an entire banquet that is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “had a celebration feast together” (2) Another possibility is that this is describing a toast that Ahasuerus and Haman shared to celebrate their plan. “Sat down” would simply be describing how the men would have reclined at a table to drink. Alternate translation: “had a celebration toast” (See: Synecdoche)

נָבֽוֹכָה

The implication is that the people in Susa were very upset about what was going to happen and they did not know what to do about it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר

The author wants us to see the contrast between the king and Haman sitting down to relax and drink and the people in the city agitated and in an uproar over what the king and Haman had proclaimed. Use a connecting word or other way that your language uses to show a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר שׁוּשָׁ֖ן

This does not mean the city itself, but the people who live there. This is a figure of speech in which something is called not by its own name, but by the name of something closely associated with it. So this means “everyone who lived in Susa” or the people in Susa (See: Metonymy)

נָבֽוֹכָה

You can translate the abstract noun confusion with a verbal phrase such as “was very confused.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 4

Esther 4 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Mordecai warns Esther to act

Mordecai tells Esther she must beg the king for the Jews’ lives even if she risks her own death.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Implicit information

There is implicit information that translators may not understand. The sentence, “Who knows whether you have come to this royal position for such a time as this?” means “maybe God made you the queen so you could save the Jews.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 4:1

וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י יָדַע֙

Here the story re-introduces Mordecai as the main character in focus. Alternate translation: “when Mordecai found out” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר נַעֲשָׂ֔ה

Alternate translation: “about Haman’s plan to kill all the Jews” or “about those letters”

וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר

These actions demonstrate extreme sadness. (See: Symbolic Action)

וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר

You can explain why Mordecai did this. Alternate translation: “he was so anguished that he tore his clothes and put on rough sackcloth and threw ashes over himself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹךְ הָ⁠עִ֔יר

The next verse shows that Mordecai was heading towards the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly here. Mordecai might have wanted to call attention to the danger that the Jews were in by going to a public location where people were used to seeing him. Or he might have wanted to contact Esther and ask her to help with the trouble. Or he might have wanted both. Alternate translation: “he started walking towards the city center, towards the king’s palace” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יִּזְעַ֛ק זְעָקָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּ⁠מָרָֽה

Great and bitter are two words that refer to the same thing and that work together. They indicate that Mordecai’s cry was so loud because it was so anguished. Alternate translation: “cried out in anguish” (See: Doublet)

Esther 4:2

וַ⁠יָּב֕וֹא

He means Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai came”

עַ֖ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that Mordecai could not come inside the gate to the king’s palace, but had to wait just outside of it. (See: Metonymy)

שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

See how you translated this in 2:19. Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s palace”

אֵ֥ין לָ⁠ב֛וֹא אֶל־שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בִּ⁠לְב֥וּשׁ שָֽׂק

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can put this information first in the verse because it explains why Mordecai waited outside. See the UST. Alternate translation: “But no one who was wearing sackcloth was allowed inside the palace gates” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Esther 4:3

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה

This expression means in every single province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. Alternate translation: “in each and every province” or “in every province of the empire” (See: Idiom)

מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ

Alternate translation: “anywhere that the letter that said to destroy the Jews was announced in public”

דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙

These two phrases are referring to the same thing, that is, the information that the letter conveyed. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious a situation this was. Alternate translation: “the letter from the king” or “the law that said to destroy the Jews” (See: Doublet)

אֵ֤בֶל גָּדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים

Alternate translation: “the Jews mourned greatly” or “when the Jews heard about it, they mourned greatly”

וְ⁠צ֥וֹם

Fasting is a sign of mourning. If your readers would not understand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “they went without food because they were so upset” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠בְכִ֖י וּ⁠מִסְפֵּ֑ד

These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how distressed the Jews were. Alternate translation: “wailed loudly” (See: Doublet)

שַׂ֣ק וָ⁠אֵ֔פֶר יֻצַּ֖ע לָֽ⁠רַבִּֽים

These were actions that demonstrated deep grief. “Many of them lay on the ground, dressed in sackcloth and sitting in ashes” (See: Symbolic Action)

Esther 4:4

נַעֲר֨וֹת אֶסְתֵּ֤ר

Alternate translation: “Esther’s female servants” of “Esther’s maids”

וְ⁠סָרִיסֶ֨י⁠הָ֙

See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “her male servants” or “her other officials” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לָ֔⁠הּ

That is, they told her that Mordecai was sitting outside the gate wearing sackcloth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד

The queen means Esther. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Esther herself became very afraid” or “this made the queen very distressed” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד

The implication is that this happened when she heard what Mordecai was doing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When she heard about this, Esther herself became very afraid” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תִּשְׁלַ֨ח בְּגָדִ֜ים לְ⁠הַלְבִּ֣ישׁ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֗י

She means Esther. This was her way of encouraging Mordecai to be hopeful and act publicly as if whatever situation he was worried about were not completely desperate. Alternate translation: “she sent servants to take to Mordecai some good clothes to wear” (See: Symbolic Action)

וְ⁠לֹ֥א קִבֵּֽל

This was Mordecai’s way of replying to Esther that the situation truly was desperate. Alternate translation: “he refused to put them on” (See: Symbolic Action)

Esther 4:5

וַ⁠תִּקְרָא֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

Alternative translation: “then Esther summoned Hathak, one of the king’s officials”

לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ

This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶעֱמִ֣יד לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ

Alternate translation: “who was one of the royal guardians whom the king had assigned to serve Esther personally” You can put this information first because it provides background information. (See: Background Information)

מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י

See how you translated this term eunuch in 1:10. (See: Translate Unknowns)

לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the guardians served Esther personally. (See: Metonymy)

לָ⁠דַ֥עַת מַה־זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠עַל־מַה־זֶּֽה

These two phrases mean similar things. In both cases, “this” refers to what Mordecai was doing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Esther now knew there must be a very serious reason why Mordecai was wearing sackcloth in such a public place. Alternate translation: “to find out why he was so distressed that he was sitting at the palace gate wearing sackcloth” (See: Parallelism)

Esther 4:6

וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הֲתָ֖ךְ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

Hathak went out specifically to speak with Mordecai and find out why he was so distressed, as Esther had asked him to do. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Hathak went out to speak with Mordecai” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר

Alternate translation: “the central plaza”

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י

Here, face figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that the open square was in front of the palace gate. (See: Metonymy)

שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

The citadel is being described by reference to something associated with it, the gate that leads into it. Alternate translation: “the citadel gate” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 4:7

אֵ֖ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ

Here, him refers to Mordecai, but here Mordecai figuratively represents the entire group of which he is a member. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman was planning to do to the Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

פָּרָשַׁ֣ת הַ⁠כֶּ֗סֶף אֲשֶׁ֨ר אָמַ֤ר הָמָן֙ לִ֠⁠שְׁקוֹל עַל־גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ בַּיְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם

This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) the amount of silver that Haman said the king would get for his treasury from the plunder that the people who destroyed the Jews would take from them, or (2) the amount of silver that Haman had said he would contribute to pay for the expenses of the plan to destroy the Jews. You could say either one as an alternate translation, but it should agree with your interpretation of 3:9.

Esther 4:8

פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן כְּתָֽב־הַ֠⁠דָּת

Alternate translation: “a copy of the letter that Haman had sent out” or “a copy of the decree”

הַ֠⁠דָּת אֲשֶׁר־נִתַּ֨ן בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֤ן

If it would help your readers to understand, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the law that the heralds had read out loud in Susa” or “the decree that the king’s servants had posted in Susa” (See: Active or Passive)

לְ⁠הַשְׁמִידָ⁠ם֙

Alternative translation: “that said that all the Jews must be killed”

לְ⁠הַרְא֥וֹת אֶת־אֶסְתֵּ֖ר וּ⁠לְ⁠הַגִּ֣יד לָ֑⁠הּ

These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize how important Mordecai knew it was for Esther to understand just what Haman was planning. “so that Esther could see exactly what it said.” (See: Parallelism)

וּ⁠לְ⁠צַוּ֣וֹת עָלֶ֗י⁠הָ

Alternate translation: “and to urge her”

לְ⁠הִֽתְחַנֶּן־ל֛⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠בַקֵּ֥שׁ

These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize the force of the action that Mordecai felt was needed. Alternate translation: “to plead with him” (See: Doublet)

מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Esther should go into the presence of the king to ask personally for the king’s intervention. Alternate translation: “to go to the king personally” (See: Metonymy)

עַל־עַמָּֽ⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”

Esther 4:10

וַ⁠תֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַ⁠הֲתָ֔ךְ וַ⁠תְּצַוֵּ֖⁠הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי

Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”

Esther 4:11

כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים

All the servants of the king refers to the royal officials in the palace. The people of the provinces refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law” (See: Merism)

כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים

Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If your readers would misunderstand this, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.

כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר

Here, Esther once again refers to a group figuratively by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”. (See: Merism)

יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶ⁠חָצֵ֨ר הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֜ית

As 5:1 makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them” (See: Symbolic Action)

אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א

If it would help your readers to understand, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person” (See: Active or Passive)

אַחַ֤ת דָּת⁠וֹ֙

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself. Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom”

לְ⁠הָמִ֔ית

Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”

לְ֠⁠בַד מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב

If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him” (See: Symbolic Action)

שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב

A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וְ⁠חָיָ֑ה

This means that the guards will not kill this person and he can proceed to speak to the king. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the guards will not kill him and he can speak to the king” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י לֹ֤א נִקְרֵ֨אתי֙ לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם

Esther is saying by implication that she cannot speak to the king as Mordecai has requested because the king has not been calling for her, which would have given her an opportunity to speak to him. If she goes without being summoned, she could be put to death. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י

This expression indicates a contrast between Esther’s present situation and the situation she has just described. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם

The phrase means that Esther has not been called in the king’s presence for a period of at least 30 days. You could use an equivalent expression in your language that would indicate this is a long enough time that Esther has reason to believe the king is not interested in seeing her. Alternate translation: “in over a month”

זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם

Alternate translation: “thirty days” (See: Numbers)

Esther 4:12

וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֔י

From this point on, the author focuses only on Mordecai and Esther and does not specify who the messenger is. You can use a general phrase such as, “they told Mordecai” or “Mordecai was told” or “messengers told Mordecai.” If that would be confusing, you can continue to specify that the messenger was Hathak, as the ancient Greek version did. See the UST.

Esther 4:13

וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר מָרְדֳּכַ֖י לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶל־אֶסְתֵּ֑ר

Alternate translation: “then Mordecai sent back this message to Esther”

Esther 4:14

רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה יַעֲמ֤וֹד לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מִ⁠מָּק֣וֹם אַחֵ֔ר

Here, relief and deliverance are spoken of as if they are living things that can rise up. Alternate translation: “someone else will rise up from another place and rescue the Jews” (See: Personification)

רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה

Here, relief and deliverance mean very similar things. They are used together to emphasize the great emotion behind being delivered from this great evil. If it works better in your language, you can use one word instead of two, as in the UST. (See: Doublet)

וְ⁠אַ֥תְּ וּ⁠בֵית־אָבִ֖י⁠ךְ תֹּאבֵ֑דוּ

The implication is that the Jews will be rescued starting in that other place, but the ones living in Susa will still be in danger because no one who could have helped them there (such as Esther) would have done anything. Alternate translation: “you and your relatives will be killed”

וּ⁠מִ֣י יוֹדֵ֔עַ אִם־לְ⁠עֵ֣ת כָּ⁠זֹ֔את הִגַּ֖עַתְּ לַ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת

This is really a statement, and it is about what is happening right then. Mordecai asks it in question form so that Esther will think deeply about her role in this situation. Alternate translation: “who knows, perhaps it was to intervene in this very situation that you became queen” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Esther 4:16

כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים הַֽ⁠נִּמְצְאִ֣ים בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live here in Susa” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠צ֣וּמוּ עָ֠לַ⁠י

The verb fast here is plural, including Mordecai and all of the Jews. Fasting (that is, going without eating) was a symbolic act that the Jews did when they were praying intensely. You could make the connection with prayer explicit. Alternate translation: “fast and pray for me” (See: Symbolic Action)

וְ⁠אַל־תֹּאכְל֨וּ וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁתּ֜וּ שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת יָמִים֙ לַ֣יְלָה וָ⁠י֔וֹם

This expression means that Esther was asking the Jews in Susa not to eat or drink anything during the day or the night for a period of three days. Alternate translation: “tell them to not eat or drink anything for three days and three nights” (See: Numbers)

גַּם־אֲנִ֥י וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתַ֖⁠י אָצ֣וּם כֵּ֑ן

Alternate translation: “my maids and I will also fast”

וּ⁠בְ⁠כֵ֞ן

Alternate translation: “after we have all done that, and while still fasting”

אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת

Alternate translation: “even though there is a law against going without being summoned”

וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי

Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”

Esther 4:17

וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר

Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”

Esther 5

Esther 5 General Notes

Structure and formatting

This chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).

Special concepts in this chapter

Esther’s respect

Esther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 5:1

וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י

This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word royalty, you could express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת

It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בַּ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֔ית

See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “the inner courtyard of the palace”

נֹ֖כַח בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

Alternate translation: “across from the room where the king was”

וְ֠⁠הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ יוֹשֵׁ֞ב עַל־כִּסֵּ֤א מַלְכוּת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת

Royalty is an abstract noun that refers to those things that belonged only to the king. You can translate this idea with a verb, “the throne he ruled from” and “the palace where he reigned,” or with an adjective, “his royal throne” and “his royal palace.” Alternate translation: “in the throne room of the palace, sitting on the king’s throne” (See: Abstract Nouns)

נֹ֖כַח פֶּ֥תַח הַ⁠בָּֽיִת

Alternate translation: “facing the entrance of the room”

Esther 5:2

וַ⁠יְהִי֩

This expression introduces what happened next. Alternate translation: “Now” or “and” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

כִ⁠רְא֨וֹת

Alternate translation: “when … noticed”

נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו

See how you translated similar expressions in 2:9, 2:15, and 2:17. Review the explanations there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus thought Esther looked very attractive as she stood in the court. It could also mean that King Ahasuerus was very pleased to see her. It could mean both. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” or “he approved of her” (See: Idiom)

נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו

Here, eyes figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that King Ahasuerus decided not to kill Esther for coming into the inner court without being summoned. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ

King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said that Esther should be executed for coming into the king’s inner court without being summoned. See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her.” (See: Symbolic Action)

וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ

King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her to signal that he would be glad to talk to her.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תִּקְרַ֣ב

Alternate translation; “so … came close” or “so … came up to the throne”

וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט

This action was probably customary for a king’s subjects in a Persian court, when the king extended the royal scepter. (See: Symbolic Action)

וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט

This action demonstrated that Esther respected the authority of King Ahasuerus and was thankful for his kindness to her. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include that information here, such as: “…to show that she respected his authority.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט

Here, head is a metonym meaning the top (or uppermost part) of an object or location. This phrase means that Esther touched the top of the king’s scepter on the end that was extended toward her. Alternate translation: “the top of the scepter” or “the tip of the scepter” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 5:3

מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה

Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”

מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ

These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is very interested in hearing why Esther has come to see him. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if it would be more natural in your language to combine them into one. Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?” (See: Parallelism)

עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ

This was probably a formal and customary expression in the Persian royal court, meant to show honor to the person making a request of the king and to indicate the king’s willingness to be very generous when answering the request. King Ahasuerus was almost certainly not offering to give Esther half of his kingdom. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is.” Alternate translation: “I will give you what you want, even if you ask me to give you half of my kingdom!” (See: Hyperbole)

וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” or “I will give you what you want” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 5:4

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב

This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19 and 3:9. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: Idiom)

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב

Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

יָב֨וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָן֙

Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “O king, please come with Haman” or “you and Haman come” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ

Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “the banquet that I have prepared for you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ

If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be singular, since here it refers just to the king. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Esther 5:5

וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

The king would have said this to his servants, not to Esther. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The king said to his servants” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָמָ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֑ר

The word of Esther means her invitation to the banquet. Alternate translation: “go and get Haman and bring him quickly to the banquet that Esther has prepared”

עָשְׂתָ֥ה

Alternate translation: “had prepared for them”

Esther 5:6

מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

These two question-and-statement pairs mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther whatever she wants. If this is confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. You could combine them into one or replace the repetition with a statement of what the repetition means, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. I will do it for you” (See: Parallelism)

מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

When Ahasuerus asked Esther in the throne room what she wanted, she said that she wanted him and Haman to come to a banquet she had prepared. But since the king asks her once again at the banquet what she wants, it is clear that he knew this was not her real request. Instead, he knew that she wanted to show him hospitality first, as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship. You can indicate this by translating, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ

The two abstract nouns petition and request can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” (See: Active or Passive)

עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת

See how you translated this expression in 5:3. Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”

Esther 5:7

וַ⁠תַּ֥עַן…וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֑ר

Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” or “replied” (See: Hendiadys)

שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י

The words petition and request mean the same thing. Esther probably used these words together as a way of speaking very formally and respectfully to the king. Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: Doublet)

שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י

The two abstract nouns petition and request can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 5:8

אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

The expression find favor means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: Idiom)

אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

Here, eyes figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means the King Ahasuerus is pleased with Esther and willing to grant her request. Alternate translation: “if the king evaluates me and approves” or “if the king is pleased with me” (See: Metaphor)

אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ ט֔וֹב

This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19, 3:9, and 5:4. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: Idiom)

לָ⁠תֵת֙ אֶת־שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־בַּקָּשָׁתִ֑⁠י

The phrases to grant my petition and to perform my request mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “to do what I want” (See: Doublet)

יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם

Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “please come with Haman to another banquet that I will prepare for you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם

If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be dual if your language uses that form, since it refers to the king and Haman, otherwise it should be plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

וּ⁠מָחָ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

The word of the king means his request for Esther to tell him what she wants. Alternate translation: “I will answer your question then”

כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “according to your word” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Esther 5:9

וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֤א

Alternate translation: “and … left the banquet”

שָׂמֵ֖חַ וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב

The word joyful and the phrase good of heart mean the same thing. These terms are used together to show that Haman was very happy after attending Esther’s banquet with King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “feeling very good” Doublet

וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב

Here, heart figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. The phrase means that Haman felt happy. (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠לֹא־קָם֙

Under other circumstances, officials were expected to bow low to the ground to show respect for Haman. See 3:2. But since Mordecai was already sitting on the ground as a sign of mourning, he would have been expected to stand up to show respect. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not stand up to show respect for Haman” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠לֹא־זָ֣ע מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ

The phrase means that Mordecai was not afraid of Haman or of what Haman might do to him for refusing to show the respect that the king had commanded. Alternate translation: “or tremble fearfully in front of him” (See: Symbolic Action)

וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֛ן עַֽל־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י חֵמָֽה

Here, Haman’s rage is described as something that could fill him up. See how you translated this expression in 3:5. Alternate translation: “Haman became very angry because of Mordecai” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 5:10

וַ⁠יִּתְאַפַּ֣ק הָמָ֔ן

There is a contrast between this sentence and the previous one. Haman felt very much like doing one thing, but he decided it would be better to do something else. The contrast can be indicated with a phrase such as “but even though.” Alternate translation: “but even though Haman was so angry, he kept himself from losing his temper” or “Haman refused to show how angry he was” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

זֶ֥רֶשׁ

This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: How to Translate Names)

Esther 5:11

וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר לָ⁠הֶ֥ם

Alternate translation: “then … made a long speech to them about”

כְּב֥וֹד עָשְׁר֖⁠וֹ

Glory and wealth are both abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “Haman told them about how great his wealth was” or “Haman told them about the many great things he owned” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠רֹ֣ב בָּנָ֑י⁠ו

Having many sons was probably seen as a mark of honor and status in Persian culture. This phrase probably means that Haman was boasting about the status he enjoyed in Persian society because he had many sons. Alternate translation: “how many sons he had” (See: Symbolic Action)

בָּנָ֑י⁠ו

This word can sometimes be used in Hebrew to mean both male and female children. However, here it clearly refers to male children, so you should translate it that way. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

גִּדְּל֤⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “how the king had continually given him more authority” or “how the king had honored him many times by giving him more important work”

נִשְּׂא֔⁠וֹ עַל

Here, lifting is a metaphor meaning to “advance” or “promote” a person to a higher, more important position than they had previously. Alternate translation: “given him a position more important than” (See: Metaphor)

הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

This means all of the others, as 3:1 makes clear. Alternate translation: “all of his other officials and administrators” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

The words officials and administrators mean similar things. If your language uses one word for these, you can combine them. (See: Doublet)

Esther 5:12

אַ֣ף

You can translate it as an exclamation because Haman believes he has saved the best for last and is now introducing what he considers to be his most recent significant honor. Alternate translation: “and that is not all” (See: Exclamations)

לֹא־הֵבִיאָה֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֧ה עִם־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ…כִּ֣י אִם־אוֹתִ֑⁠י

This can be expressed positively. Alternate translation: “I was the only one Queen Esther invited besides the king” or “Queen Esther invited just two of us, the king and me” (See: Double Negatives)

עָשָׂ֖תָה

Alternate translation: “she had prepared”

וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 5:13

וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙

This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “…does not satisfy me” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה

Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”

הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י

This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”

Esther 5:14

וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו

The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו

This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”

יַֽעֲשׂוּ

You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עֵץ֮

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: Translate Unknowns)

גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒

You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: Biblical Distance)

אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠בֹֽא…אֶל הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ

Then indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן

The word was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, face figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ

Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”

הָ⁠עֵֽץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 6

Esther 6 General Notes

Structure and formatting

This chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.

Special concepts in this chapter

Approaching the king

It was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.

Esther 6:1

בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא

This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

Here, sleep is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep” (See: Personification)

וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא

He means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

סֵ֤פֶר הַ⁠זִּכְרֹנוֹת֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים

This is equivalent to the expression “the book of the events of days” in 2:23. See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “the royal chronicles” or “the records of what had happened during all the time that he had been king”

וַ⁠יִּהְי֥וּ נִקְרָאִ֖ים

This means that the chronicles were read out loud. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the young men got the chronicles and began to read them out loud” (See: Active or Passive)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the book was being read in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “to the king” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 6:2

וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֣א כָת֗וּב

Both terms found and recorded can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the writers had recorded there” or “they read the part where the writers had written” (See: Active or Passive)

הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל

The implication is that Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering the plot and telling him about it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering a plot against the king and telling him about it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל

To relate the events in chronological order, you can put this at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “but Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering their plot and telling him about it” (See: Order of Events)

בִּגְתָ֣נָא וָ⁠תֶ֗רֶשׁ

These are the same two men who are named in 2:21. However, there the first man’s name is said to be “Bigthan.” Decide on a consistent way of translating these names so your readers will know that they are the same men. (See: How to Translate Names)

שְׁנֵי֙ סָרִיסֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

See how you translated the term eunuch in 1:10. Alternate translation: “two of the royal guardians” (See: Translate Unknowns)

מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֖י הַ⁠סַּ֑ף

See how you translated this expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “who protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters”

בִּקְשׁוּ֙

Here, seeking figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they had planned” or “they had tried” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד

As in 2:21, the expression to stretch out a hand means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “to assassinate” or “to kill” (See: Idiom)

Esther 6:3

מַֽה־נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה יְקָ֧ר וּ⁠גְדוּלָּ֛ה לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י

Honor and greatness have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize that Mordecai should certainly have been honored in some grand way for saving the king’s life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can express this by putting the terms together. For example, you could say, “What great honor was done for Mordecai?” Alternate translation: “what did we do to reward Mordecai or to show that we appreciated what he did” (See: Hendiadys)

נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what did I do” or “what did we do” (See: Active or Passive)

לֹא־נַעֲשָׂ֥ה עִמּ֖⁠וֹ דָּבָֽר

You can say this with an active form. However, it would be good to say this in a way that does not create the impression that the young men are accusing the king. Alternate translation: “no one did anything for him” (See: Active or Passive)

עַל־זֶ֑ה

Alternate translation: “for saving my life”

Esther 6:4

מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר

This could mean either: (1) The king knows that there is someone in the courtyard, maybe because he heard someone walking there; he wants to know who it is. (2) Since there are always people around the palace, the king assumes that there must be someone out in the courtyard. In either case, the king wants to know if there is someone there with whom he could consult about the best way to honor Mordecai. As the story has already said in 1:13, it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king wanted to consult someone about the best way to honor Mordecai, so he asked, ‘who is in the courtyard’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר

In order to present the events in logical and chronological order, you can put the king’s question last in the verse if that would be more natural in your language. Haman had already come in the courtyard by the time the king asked this question.

וְ⁠הָמָ֣ן בָּ֗א לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ

This sentence indicates that Haman had already entered the outer court when King Ahasuerus asked his question. You could indicate this with a phrase such as “at that moment” or “just then” or “while they were talking” (See: Connect — Background Information)

לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה

This phrase is describing the first courtyard a person would come to after entering the palace from the outside. Alternate translation: “the outer courtyard of the palace”

לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י

Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”

הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”

הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 6:5

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. You can say so If your readers would misunderstand this. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הִנֵּ֥ה

This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יָבֽוֹא

Alternate translation: “he may come in”

Esther 6:6

וַ⁠יָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”

מַה־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֕וֹת בָּ⁠אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ

Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “what should I do for the man whom I would really like to honor” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ

To delight in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “whom I am glad to honor” or “whom I want to honor” (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ

Here, heart could mean two different things: (1) Heart could figuratively represent the action of thinking or feeling. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said in his thoughts.” (2) Heart could also be a metaphor meaning to be inside someone or something. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said inside himself.” Either way, the phrase means that Haman was not saying this out loud, but saying it to himself in his thoughts. Alternate translation: “Haman thought to himself” (See: Metaphor)

לְ⁠מִ֞י יַחְפֹּ֥ץ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת יְקָ֖ר יוֹתֵ֥ר מִמֶּֽ⁠נִּי

Haman is actually making a statement to himself rather than asking a question and trying to figure out the answer. He uses a question form to emphasize how true he believes the statement to be. If your readers would misunderstand this, instead of a question, you could use a statement such as, “Surely there is no one whom the king would take pleasure in honoring more than me!” Alternate translation: “whom would the king like to honor more than me” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Esther 6:7

אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ

To delight in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “for a man the king is glad to honor” or “for a man the king wants to honor” (See: Idiom)

אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “if you really want to honor someone” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Esther 6:8

יָבִ֨יאוּ֙

The implication is that the king’s servants would do this. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “let someone bring” or “tell your servants to bring” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לְב֣וּשׁ מַלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

Royalty is an abstract noun that refers to anything that belongs to the king. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal garment.” Alternate translation: “one of your own royal robes that you have already worn yourself” or “one of the robes you wear to show that you are the king” (See: Abstract Nouns)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “that you have already worn yourself” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠ס֗וּס אֲשֶׁ֨ר רָכַ֤ב עָלָי⁠ו֙

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “a horse that you have already ridden yourself” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ

This whole phrase refers to the horse. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ

The implication is that this would be done to show that this was one of the king’s own horses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head to show that it belongs to you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת

Royalty is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 6:9

וְ⁠נָת֨וֹן הַ⁠לְּב֜וּשׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙

Here, hand is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse” (See: Metaphor)

אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֔ים

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

וְ⁠הִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙

Since them is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. You can say this explicitly If your readers would misunderstand this. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ

To delight in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: Idiom)

הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ

Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר

This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in 4:6), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”

וְ⁠קָרְא֣וּ

Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”

לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו

Here, face figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them” (See: Metonymy)

כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ

To delight in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” or “this is what the king does when he especially wants to honor someone” (See: Idiom)

כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this” or “this is what the king does” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 6:10

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ

The implication is that the king liked Haman’s suggestion. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king liked this idea, so he replied” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר דִּבַּ֔רְתָּ וַֽ⁠עֲשֵׂה־כֵן֙

Alternate translation: “do everything that you have said” or “do just what you have suggested”

הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

As in 2:19, this is likely an idiom which means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the king’s gate” (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the gate to the palace” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר

Here the action of letting fall is a metaphor meaning to leave out or leave unfulfilled. The phrase means that Haman must do absolutely everything that he said. Alternate translation: “do not leave out anything that you suggested” (See: Metaphor)

אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר

This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “Be sure to do absolutely everything that you have said” (See: Double Negatives)

Esther 6:11

וַ⁠יַּרְכִּיבֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר

See how you translated these expressions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “seated him on the horse and then led the horse through the public square of the city”

וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו

Here, face figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman shouted out to the people in front of Mordecai, that is, the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “called out to all of the people in front of him” (See: Metonymy)

אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ

To delight in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” (See: Idiom)

Esther 6:12

אָבֵ֖ל וַ⁠חֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ

People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced” (See: Symbolic Action)

Esther 6:13

וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן

The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in 5:10 to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told…” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ

The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠יֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨⁠וֹ חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠זֶ֣רֶשׁ

The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו

See how you translated this expression in 1:13. Alternate translation: “his advisors”

אִ֣ם…מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִ⁠נְפֹּ֤ל לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙

This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he…” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he…” (See: Metaphor)

לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙

Here, face figuratively represents the front of a person. This could mean: (1) that Haman has already begun to fall down (bow down) in front of Mordecai figuratively, or (2) that Haman and Mordecai are facing one another figuratively in hand-to-hand combat. Alternate translation: “before whom” or “in whose presence” (See: Metonymy)

מִ⁠זֶּ֣רַע הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים

Here, seed is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “one of the Jewish people” (See: Metaphor)

לֹא־תוּכַ֣ל ל֔⁠וֹ

Here Haman’s wife and friends are again speaking figuratively as if Haman is in a battle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “you will not win against him” or “you will not have greater honor than he has” (See: Metaphor)

כִּֽי

This conjunction indicates a contrast between the actions of prevailing (in the previous clause) and falling. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

נָפ֥וֹל תִּפּ֖וֹל

Here the action of falling: (1) either refers once again to prostrating oneself, and is a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated, or (2) Haman’s wife and friends are saying that for Haman, defeat will be the outcome of the figurative battle. Alternate translation: “you will certainly lose to him” (See: Metaphor)

לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו

Here, face figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman will lose in his struggle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “before him” or “in his presence” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 6:14

עוֹדָ⁠ם֙ מְדַבְּרִ֣ים עִמּ֔⁠וֹ

This phrase indicates something that happened after Haman’s wife and friends started talking with Haman and while they were still talking. You should indicate this with a phrase such as “while.” Alternate translation: “while they were still talking together, the king’s eunuchs arrived” (See: Connect — Background Information)

וְ⁠סָרִיסֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

See how you decided to translate this term in 1:10. Not all of the king’s eunuchs came. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the king’s servants” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠יַּבְהִ֨לוּ֙ לְ⁠הָבִ֣יא אֶת־הָמָ֔ן

Alternative translation: “they wanted to bring Haman quickly”

אֲשֶׁר־עָשְׂתָ֥ה אֶסְתֵּֽר

Esther’s servants would have done most of the work of preparing the banquet. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Esther and her servants had prepared” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 7

Esther 7 General Notes

Structure and formatting

The story of Haman’s fall concludes in this chapter.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Covering Haman’s face

When “the servants covered Haman’s face,” they were showing that he had been condemned to be executed. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 7:1

וַ⁠יָּבֹ֤א הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠הָמָ֔ן לִ⁠שְׁתּ֖וֹת עִם־אֶסְתֵּ֥ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּֽה

Esther hosted Ahasuerus and Haman for more than just drinks. This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. An entire banquet is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “so the king and Haman went to the second banquet that Queen Esther had prepared” (See: Synecdoche)

Esther 7:2

בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙

This refers to the day after the first banquet, as mentioned in 5:8. Alternate translation: “at that second banquet” or “on that second day of feasting” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בְּ⁠מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן

Alternate translation: “while they were drinking wine” or “while the servants were pouring the wine and giving it to them”

מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ…וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

These two statements mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is truly disposed to giving Esther what she wants. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: Parallelism)

מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ

Ahasuerus has now allowed Esther to show her hospitality at two banquets. But he knows that she has done this as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship, and that this signals that she has an important and urgent request to make. You can indicate this by having the king ask, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you what you ask for” or “I will do for you what you ask” (See: Active or Passive)

שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ

The two abstract nouns petition and request can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: Abstract Nouns)

עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת

See how you translated this expression in 5:3 and 5:6. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is” (See: Hyperbole)

Esther 7:3

וַ⁠תַּ֨עַן…וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֔ר

Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” (See: Hendiadys)

אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Favor means the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: Idiom)

אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙

Here, eyes figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

In this case, Esther is addressing Ahasuerus directly as “O king”; she is not speaking about him in the third person as a sign of respect, as she and others usually do elsewhere in the story. This may indicate a special urgency to what she is saying, so it would be good to include this difference in your translation or indicate the urgency in some other way.

וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב

This is an idiom that also appears in 1:19, 3:9, 5:4, and 5:8. The suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good plan to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But here, Esther has just addressed the king directly with “O king” and she is pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people. So an alternate translation here could be something more like, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” (See: Idiom)

תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י

The phrases at my petition and at my request mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the urgency of the request. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two requests. Alternate translation: “please spare my life and save my people” or “my request is that you spare my life and the lives of my people” (See: Parallelism)

תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please spare my life” (See: Active or Passive)

בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י

The abstract noun petition can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “that is what I am asking for” or “that is what I want” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י

If this is unclear in your language, you can repeat from the previous clause the words that have been left out. Alternate translation: “and let my people be given to me” (See: Ellipsis)

בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י

The abstract noun request can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “rhat is what I am asking for” or “rhat is what I want” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 7:4

כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙

As Esther points out later in the verse, the Jews actually have not been exchanged for money. Rather, sell is a figurative way of saying “turn over to.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this meaning by saying something like “For someone has turned us over to our enemies.” Alternatively, you could use the same figure, but show that it is a comparison. Alternate translation: “it is as though I and my people are cattle that have been sold to be slaughtered” (See: Metaphor)

כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has sold us” or “for someone has put us in danger of our enemies” (See: Active or Passive)

לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד

As in 3:13, these words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction. If using three words would be difficult or confusing in your language, you can use one word for this and indicate that the destruction is extreme. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: Doublet)

לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד

If your language does not use abstract nouns such as these, you can replace them with one or more verbs. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ֠⁠אִלּוּ לַ⁠עֲבָדִ֨ים וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁפָח֤וֹת נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙

Alternate translation: “if the men and even the women had been sold into slavery”

אֵ֥ין הַ⁠צָּ֛ר שֹׁוֶ֖ה בְּ⁠נֵ֥זֶק הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Esther is speaking very deferentially and with some exaggeration in order to impress on the king how important this is to her. She is saying that it would have been worth less to her to see her people rescued from slavery than it would have been to see the king spared the trouble of intervening on their behalf. (Haman uses the expression of “not equal” in this same sense in 5:13.) Alternate translation: “that would have been a matter too small to bother you with” or “that would be a small matter to a king like you, but this is very much worse” (See: Hyperbole)

הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Esther addresses King Ahasuerus in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Esther 7:5

וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר

These two words mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “responded” (See: Doublet)

מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא

These two phrases mean similar things. They both ask about the identity of the man who is trying to destroy the Jews. King Ahasuerus uses the repetition to emphasize how outraged he is. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two phrases. However, from another perspective, both the man’s identity and his location are important to know so that his plot can be stopped. So, for that reason, you could also decide to include both phrases in your translation. (See: Parallelism)

מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא

Alternate translation: “who has done this”

וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁר־מְלָא֥⁠וֹ לִבּ֖⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת כֵּֽן

Here the concept of a full heart uses two metaphors at once. “Heart” figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. Also, saying that the “heart” is “full” is a figurative way of saying that someone is fully intending to do something, usually something that should not be done. Alternate translation: “where is the man who is intending to do such a thing” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 7:6

צַ֣ר וְ⁠אוֹיֵ֔ב

These words mean the same thing. Together, they emphasize Haman’s complete hostility towards the Jews. If it is more natural in your language, you can combine them and indicate the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “the one who is our absolute nemesis” (See: Doublet)

נִבְעַ֔ת

Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”

נִבְעַ֔ת מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 7:7

וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּ⁠חֲמָת⁠וֹ֙ מִ⁠מִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן

Here, in his rage is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up” (See: Idiom)

אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַ⁠בִּיתָ֑ן

The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you can say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁ⁠וֹ֙

Here, seeking figuratively means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life” (See: Metaphor)

כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה

Here, seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood” (See: Metaphor)

כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him” (See: Active or Passive)

כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here the abstract noun evil means “harm,” not something that is morally wrong as in the previous verse. In this context, it can be expressed with a verb such as “execute.” Alternate translation: “the king was likely to execute him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 7:8

וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ שָׁב֩…וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל

The implication is that when the king returned to the room, he saw what this verse describes next. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the king returned…, he saw that Haman had fallen…” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ

The implication is that Haman was doing this as he pleaded for his life. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can add that information to the end of this phrase: “…as he was begging Esther to spare his life” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ

If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST. (See: Order of Events)

וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ

The expression was fallen means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining” (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ

In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”

הֲ֠⁠גַם לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת

The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can phrase it as a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: Rhetorical Question)

לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה

The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen” (See: Euphemism)

עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת

These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you can also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house” (See: Parallelism)

הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִ⁠פִּ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this” (See: Idiom)

הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר…וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ

The king spoke, and then the servants covered Haman’s face. One action followed upon another. However, this happened so quickly that almost no time seemed to pass in between. You can indicate this with a phrase like “as soon as.” Alternate translation: “when the king said this, immediately they covered Haman’s face” (See: Connect — Background Information)

וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ

The implication is that some the king’s servants who were present did this, and they did it because they understood that the king wanted Haman to be executed. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face because he was going to be executed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ

Covering the face in this culture, as in many others, was a sign that a person had been condemned to death. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face to show that he would be executed” (See: Symbolic Action)

Esther 7:9

חַ֠רְבוֹנָה

This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in 1:10. (See: How to Translate Names)

אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: Metonymy)

הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

See how you translated this term and this phrase in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally” (See: Translate Unknowns)

הִנֵּה

Behold is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”

גַּ֣ם…הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י…עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן

Alternate translation:“Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”

הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: Translate Unknowns)

לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.” (See: Idiom)

דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

עֹמֵד֙

Alternate translation: “is set up”

גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can convert this to a modern measure. See how you translated this phrase in 5:14. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: Biblical Distance)

תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו

Him means Haman. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 7:10

הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה

Here the story figuratively compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 8

Esther 8 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

God’s protection

Yahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.

Esther 8:1

בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא

This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן

Here, house figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: Synecdoche)

צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים

This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence” (See: Metonymy)

הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ

You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her” (See: Order of Events)

הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ

Esther told this to the king. She would likely have explained not just how she and Mordecai were related, but that he had raised her after her parents died. You can say this If your readers would misunderstand this. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king that Mordecai was her cousin and that he had been like a father to her” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 8:2

וַ⁠יָּ֨סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ…וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king” (See: Symbolic Action)

טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ

See how you translated this in 3:10. Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it” (See: Translate Unknowns)

אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן

This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: Order of Events)

וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י

By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן

To place someone over something figuratively means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman” (See: Metaphor)

בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן

See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 8:3

וַ⁠תּ֣וֹסֶף אֶסְתֵּ֗ר וַ⁠תְּדַבֵּר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Here the exact meaning of the progression of verbs is uncertain, but this verse probably begins a new event in the story separate from what happened in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then Esther again spoke in the king’s presence” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “while she was in his presence” (See: Metonymy)

וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו

Here, falling is an idiom referring to the action of bowing down or prostrating oneself, and face figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. Alternate translation: “and she bowed down” or “and she prostrated herself” (See: Idiom)

וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו

This may actually mean that Esther put her face right on top of the feet of King Ahasuerus. This would have been an act of humility and desperation by which she showed that her need was very great and that she believed the king had great power to help her. (See: Symbolic Action)

וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו

Esther’s action was probably a recognized sign of pleading in this culture. However, it would likely still have been remarkable for a queen to fall at the feet of her husband, the king. You can show this by introducing the information with a phrase like “in fact.” Alternate translation: “in fact, to show how desperately she was pleading, Esther got down and put her face right on top of his feet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו

Here, face is a metonym meaning the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means that Esther prostrated herself in front of the feet of King Ahasuerus. (See: Metonymy)

לְ⁠הַֽעֲבִיר֙ אֶת־רָעַת֙ הָמָ֣ן הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י

Here, the evil refers to Haman’s plan. This expression means to prevent a wrong action from happening. Alternate translation: “to stop the evil plan of Haman the Agagite” or “to prevent the evil things from happening that Haman the Agagite had planned” (See: Idiom)

הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י

This is the name of Haman’s people group. See how you translated this in 3:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

מַֽחֲשַׁבְתּ֔⁠וֹ אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָשַׁ֖ב

Alternate translation: “and the plot that he had invented” or “and the plot that Haman invented”

Esther 8:4

וַ⁠יּ֤וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֵ֖ת שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב

As in 5:2, King Ahasuerus did this to show that Esther had his favor. In that earlier episode, this indicated that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed for coming into the inner court without being summoned. But since Esther was apparently already in the king’s presence on this occasion, it seems that the gesture could also be used generally to show that the king was positively disposed towards a person and would grant the person’s request. Alternate translation: “the king held out his golden scepter to Esther” (See: Symbolic Action)

שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב

See how you translated this in 4:11. If it would be helpful, review the explanation of what this object was. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: Translate Unknowns)

וַ⁠תָּ֣קָם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר

Alternate translation: “Esther got up off the floor”

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means the Esther now stood facing King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “and stood facing the king” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 8:5

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב…וְ⁠כָשֵׁ֤ר הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king will think that her suggestion is a good idea and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if what I am going to suggest seems like a good idea to you” (See: Parallelism)

וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו…וְ⁠טוֹבָ֥ה אֲנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king is positively disposed towards her, that he thinks well of her, and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: Parallelism)

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו

Here Esther addresses the king throughout in the third person as a way of showing respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person, as in the UST. (See: First, Second or Third Person)

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב

This is an idiom that also appears in 1:19, 3:9, 5:4, and 5:8. A suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But in another place, 7:3, when Esther was pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people, the suggested alternate translation was, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” Here, Esther is also pleading, so you could use that phrase here in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “if what I ask for seems right in the king’s evaluation” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן

This expression also appears many times in the story. It means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: Idiom)

לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively means the presence of a person. These phrases could mean “as I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Esther’s request would become evident in his face first, so it would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “you” (See: Metonymy)

בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו

Here, eyes figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and I please you” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: Metaphor)

יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים

The first letters that told of the plan to destroy the Jews would not be brought back to Susa physically. Rather, bring back is an idiom that means “cancel” or “revoke.” Alternate translation: “make a new law to cancel what Haman decreed” (See: Idiom)

יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “write a new letter” or “make a new law” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 8:6

כִּ֠י

Here Esther is giving the reason why she is asking King Ahasuerus to revoke the letters. Alternate translation: “the reason I am asking is that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י

Esther is actually making a statement, but she expresses herself in question form to show how strongly she feels about what she is saying. She does not actually expect the king to tell her how she could bear seeing her people destroyed. Alternate translation: “I cannot bear to see disaster fall on the Jews” or “I cannot endure watching my relatives be killed” (See: Rhetorical Question)

אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י

These two sentences mean basically the same thing. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is saying. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I could not bear to see my relatives and my whole people destroyed” (See: Parallelism)

בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י

Even though it was morally very wrong for Haman to want to destroy Mordecai’s whole people, here the abstract noun evil likely means “harm,” as in 7:7. It means the same thing as “destruction” in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “my people being destroyed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

יִמְצָ֣א

As in 1:5, find is an idiom that means something exists in a certain place or time, not that people were looking for it and located it. Esther is speaking of the harm that will exist for the Jews if the effect of Haman’s letters is not undone. Alternate translation: “would be destroyed” (See: Idiom)

בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן

This abstract noun can be expressed with a verb such as “destroyed.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י

Alternate translation: “my relatives”

Esther 8:7

הִנֵּ֨ה

This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”

בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר

See the note about this expression in 8:1. Alternate translation: “I have given Esther all the property that belonged to Haman” or “I have given Esther the household of Haman”

בֵית־הָמָ֜ן

Here, house is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ

You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows” (See: Order of Events)

הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: Translate Unknowns)

שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ

Here the expression to stretch out a hand means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: Idiom)

Esther 8:8

וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם

Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”

כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙

Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”

כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙

Here, eyes figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best” (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Here, name is a metaphor meaning authority. This phrase means Esther and Mordecai have permission to write with the authority of the King Ahasuerus. (See: Metaphor)

בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I give you permission to write with my own authority” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

This is a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: Translate Unknowns)

בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

כִּֽי

Here, King Ahasuerus is expressing the reason why he cannot simply revoke the first letter and also why Esther and Mordecai can write another letter that people must obey. Alternate translation: “you see” or “people will obey your letter because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב

As in verse 5, this expression means “revoke.” Alternate translation: “no one can revoke” or “no one can nullify”

כְתָ֞ב…אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can put this first in the verse because it explains why Ahasuerus answers Esther and Mordecai in the way that he does. See the UST.

כְתָ֞ב אֲשֶׁר־נִכְתָּ֣ב בְּ⁠שֵׁם־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠נַחְתּ֛וֹם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ

The king is describing a general situation, but he has Haman’s letter specifically in mind. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman wrote his letter with my authority, and he sealed it with the ring that has my official seal on it. No one can revoke a letter like that” (The story explained in 1:19 that the king’s laws could not be changed once they had been made and proclaimed.) (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 8:9

וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ

This indicates that what is described in this verse was done because of what the king said in the previous verse. Use a connecting word or phrase to show this in your language. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king called his scribes” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ

If you use an expression such as “called,” make sure your readers will understand that the king likely sent an official to go and bring the scribes back with him. The king did not call out in a loud voice to get them to come.

בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י

Alternate translation: “in month three” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י

It would still be the same year as in 3:7, the twelfth year that Ahasuerus reigned as king of Persia. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the third month of the year” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן

Sivan is the name of the third month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “the month of Sivan” (See: Hebrew Months)

הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן

The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court, but for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given. This month overlaps with May and June on a Western calendar.

בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֣ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒

Alternation translation: “on day 23” or “on the twenty-third day of the month” The exact date of the letter helps to establish its legal authority. This would be on June 25th of a Western calendar. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מָרְדֳּכַ֣י

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and they wrote in a letter everything that Mordecai dictated to them” (See: Active or Passive)

אֶל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים

It appears from verse 11 that the letter would have been addressed specifically to the Jews in the empire, telling them that the king had authorized them to defend themselves. But copies were also sent to all the royal and provincial officials. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the letter addressed the Jews in the empire, but copies were also sent” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠אֶ֣ל הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִֽים־וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּחוֹת֩ וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת

See how you translated these terms in 3:12, where they were used to describe who received Haman’s letter. These are all people in government positions. The first one is the governor of the province and the other two are rulers under him who govern cities or smaller areas. If your language uses one term for all of these, you could use that with a descriptive phrase such as “to the government leaders of each province and also to the leaders under him.”

אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֗וּשׁ שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה

This is background information explaining how far this new letter had to be sent. See how you translated this phrase in 1:1. Alternate translation: “the empire of Ahasuerus had 127 provinces, stretching all the way from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west”

שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה

Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: Numbers)

מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙

This expression means “to people in every province.” Alternate translation: “the scribes wrote to the people in each province” (See: Idiom)

כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ

Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”

וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם

This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group” (See: Idiom)

כִּ⁠לְשֹׁנ֑⁠וֹ

Here, tongue figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: Metonymy)

וְ⁠אֶ֨ל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם וְ⁠כִ⁠לְשׁוֹנָֽ⁠ם

The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”

Esther 8:10

וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֗ב…וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם

He refers to Mordecai. You can use his name here If your readers would misunderstand this.

בְּ⁠שֵׁם֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ

Here, name is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus” (See: Metaphor)

וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בְּ⁠יַד֩ הָ⁠רָצִ֨ים בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֜ים

As in 3:13, hand could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters” (See: Metaphor)

רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים

Alternate translation: “They rose fast horses that were used in the king’s service. These horses had been bred in the king’s stables.”

בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים

Here, sons is a metonym meaning the offspring of royal livestock. Alternate translation: “the offspring of the king’s horses” (See: Metonymy)

Esther 8:11

בְּ⁠כָל־עִיר־וָ⁠עִ֗יר

This expression means “in each and every city.” It is possibly referring to the entire empire by naming one part of it, its cities. The story says in 9:19 that not just Jews living in cities but Jews living in rural areas also defended themselves. It is likely that the messengers only published the news in the cities and not the entire countryside, but the news was certainly intended for everyone, not only people living in the cities. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire” or “in each and every city” or “in every single city” (See: Idiom)

לְ⁠הִקָּהֵל֮ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ⁠ם֒

Here, to stand is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “to join together and fight for their lives” or “to join together and fight back” (See: Metaphor)

לְ⁠הַשְׁמִיד֩ וְ⁠לַ⁠הֲרֹ֨ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד

These words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is being described. See how you translated this in 3:13 and 7:4. Alternate translation: “completely destroy” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: Doublet)

כָּל־חֵ֨יל עַ֧ם וּ⁠מְדִינָ֛ה הַ⁠צָּרִ֥ים אֹתָ֖⁠ם

Strength is a figurative way of referring to an army or to a person carrying weaponry. Alternate translation: “the army of any people or province that attacked them” (See: Metonymy)

טַ֣ף וְ⁠נָשִׁ֑ים

Alternate translation: “they could also kill the wives and children of the armed men”

וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז

See how you translated this expression in 3:13. Alternate translation: “and take everything that belonged to them”

Esther 8:12

בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד

This was the day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews in 3:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “on the same day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ

Alternate translation: “in every province of the kingdom”

בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר

Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר

Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר

Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר

This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in 3:07 and 3:13. (See: Hebrew Months)

Esther 8:13

פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה

This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: Idiom)

גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them” (See: Active or Passive)

וְ⁠לִ⁠הְי֨וֹת הַיְּהוּדִ֤ים עֲתִידִים֙ לַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה

Alternate translation: “that way the Jews would get ready to do what the letter said when the day came”

לְ⁠הִנָּקֵ֖ם מֵ⁠אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶֽם

This expression, “to take revenge from” another person, means to correct a wrong they have done. In this context, the phrase means to correct the wrong of the original law that gave people permission to kill the Jews. Alternate translation: “and fight back against their enemies” (See: Idiom)

Esther 8:14

הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים

See how you translated this in 8:10. Alternate translation: “messengers riding on fast horses that were used for the king’s business”

מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible” (See: Active or Passive)

מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים

These two terms mean almost the same thing and are used together to emphasize the fact that the couriers were told to deliver the letters as quickly as possible. Alternate translation: “they went immediately” or “as quickly as possible” (See: Doublet)

הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים

To present the events in chronological order, you can put this after the king’s command, as in the UST. (See: Order of Events)

וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king’s officials also posted and read copies of the letter” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 8:15

וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י יָצָ֣א

This introduces a new event in the story. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Mordecai had been in the presence of King Ahasuerus and was now leaving in order to fulfill his duties as a high official in the Persian government. Alternate translation: “from the palace” (See: Metonymy)

בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת וָ⁠ח֔וּר וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה וְ⁠תַכְרִ֥יךְ בּ֖וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן

The implication is that the king gave Mordecai these special things to wear to show that he was now his highest officer. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. To put these events in chronological order, you can place this information before the report that Mordecai left the king’s presence to fulfill his duties. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת

Alternate translation: “a blue and white garment that the king had worn”

וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה

Alternate translation: “a large golden crown”

וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֣יר שׁוּשָׁ֔ן צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה

Here, the city represents the people living in it. Alternate translation: “the people of Susa” (See: Metonymy)

צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word rejoiced tells how they cheered. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning by saying something like “shouted joyfully.” Alternate translation: “cheered and were happy” (See: Hendiadys)

צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה

The implication is that the people did this when they saw Mordecai. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 8:16

הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה

Here, light figuratively represents happiness. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt happy” (See: Metaphor)

הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֑ה

The terms light and joy refer to the same thing here. They are used together to emphasize the extreme happiness that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt very happy” (See: Doublet)

וְ⁠שָׂשֹׂ֖ן וִ⁠יקָֽר

These terms have similar meaning and are used together with the previous doublet to emphasize again the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. (See: Doublet)

וִ⁠יקָֽר

Here, honor might have two possible meanings. (1) Other people honored the Jews. Alternate translation: “other people honored them” (2) The Jews themselves felt honor instead of shame. Alternate translation: “they felt honored” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 8:17

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֨ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֜ה

This expression means “each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: Idiom)

וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֗יר

This expression means “each and every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: Idiom)

מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ

This expression describes the king’s message as if it were a person that could travel to a particular place. This phrase refers to all the places that received the king’s letter. Alternate translation: “wherever the king’s couriers took his decree” or “wherever the couriers read the letter announcing the king’s decree” (See: Personification)

שִׂמְחָ֤ה וְ⁠שָׂשׂוֹן֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים

The terms joy and rejoicing have similar meaning and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews rejoiced greatly” (See: Doublet)

מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

These two terms mean something similar and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “and had festive celebrations” (See: Doublet)

וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. Alternate translation: “and a holiday” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים

The implication is that they did this because they thought that the Jews might attack them when the Jews fought back against their enemies. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים

Alternate translation: “many people from the other ethnic groups in the empire”

מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙

The peoples of the land were the non-Jewish people groups within the empire. (See: Idiom)

נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

Here, falling is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they had become very afraid of the Jews” (See: Metaphor)

נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

To present the events in chronological order, you can say this before saying that the people from the other groups became Jews themselves. (See: Order of Events)

Esther 9

Esther 9 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Purim

The events of this chapter were so significant, the Jews celebrated these events every year after this. It is known as “Purim.”

Important stylistic devices in this chapter

Ironic Situation

The day that was supposed to bring great victory to the enemies of the Jews became a day of great victory for the Jews. This is a type of irony.

Opening Summary

Verse 1 of chapter 9 provides a summary of everything that happens in this chapter. If using an opening summary is not normally used in your language, be sure to mark this as a summary either in the text or in a footnote. An opening summary like this is a characteristic device of Hebrew storytelling. So even though it describes the final outcome, we do not recommend that you move it to the end of the chapter unless it is very confusing to leave it here. To make it clear that verse 1 is only a summary and not the entire story, you could say something like this at the end of the verse: “This is what happened” or “Here are more details about what happened.”

Esther 9:1

וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ

This introduces a new event. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ

The implication is that this happened in the twelfth month of the same year that the letters were sent out. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that year, the month of Adar” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ

Alternate translation: “now in the twelfth month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר

Adar is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in 3:7, 3:13, and 8:12. (See: Hebrew Months)

בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the month” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

אֲשֶׁ֨ר…דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת

Alternate translation: “what the letters said the king had decreed”

אֲשֶׁ֨ר הִגִּ֧יעַ דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת

This expression describes the king’s decree as if it had traveled through time (as a person travels through space) and reached this particular day. This phrase means that it was time for people to obey the decree. Alternate translation: “when the time came for people to obey the king’s law and decree” or “when it was the day established in the king’s letters for people to carry out the king’s law” (See: Personification)

בַּ⁠יּ֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר שִׂבְּר֜וּ אֹיְבֵ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט בָּ⁠הֶ֔ם

Alternate translation: “the enemies of the Jews had expected to defeat the Jews on that day”

לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט

This word usually means “to rule over,” but here it figuratively means “to have power over, to be able to destroy.” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠נַהֲפ֣וֹךְ

Saying that a situation was turned over is a figurative way of saying that what happened was the opposite of what was expected. Alternate translation: “the situation was reversed” or “the opposite happened” (See: Metaphor)

ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִשְׁלְט֧וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים הֵ֖מָּה בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם

Alternate translation: “Instead, it was the Jews themselves who destroyed their enemies”

בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם

This is an idiom that describes enemies (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:2

לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד

Here the expression to stretch out a hand means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. Alternate translation: “to defend themselves” or “to fight” (See: Idiom)

בִּ⁠מְבַקְשֵׁ֖י רָֽעָתָ֑⁠ם

Here the abstract noun evil likely means “harm,” as in 7:7 and 8:6. In this context, the term can be expressed with a verb. Alternate translation: “who were trying to destroy them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם

Alternate translation: “no one stood against them” or “no one was able to defeat them” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם

Here, standing is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “was able to fight back” (See: Metaphor)

לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם

Here, face figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so here it means “when faced with them.” Alternate translation: “against them” (See: Metonymy)

נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים

Here, falling is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “all the peoples suddenly became very afraid” (See: Metaphor)

נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים

The implication is that as a result, no one helped anyone who attacked the Jews. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 9:3

שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת וְ⁠הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּח֗וֹת

See how you translated these terms in 3:12 and 8:9. Alternate translation: “the government leaders in each province”

וְ⁠עֹשֵׂ֤י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Alternate translation: “anyone the king had trusted with his affairs”

מְנַשְּׂאִ֖ים אֶת־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֑ים

Here, lifting up is a figurative way of saying “helping.” The picture is likely of someone helping a tired or injured person to stand or walk by holding them up. Alternate translation: “helped the Jews” (See: Metaphor)

נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

Here, falling is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of Mordecai” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 9:4

כִּֽי

This term introduces the reason why the officials and satraps and governors were becoming afraid of Mordecai. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

The implication is that this is why all the other officials were afraid of Mordecai. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “They were afraid of him because” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

The palace of the king is a figurative way of describing the king’s administration by referring to the place where it was headquartered. Alternate translation: “was very important in the king’s government” (See: Metonymy)

גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ

Great here is the same term that, as a verb, describes promotion within the king’s service in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was a very important royal official”

וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖⁠וֹ הוֹלֵ֣ךְ בְּ⁠כָל־הַ⁠מְּדִינ֑וֹת

Here the story speaks of the news of Mordecai’s greatness as if it were a living thing that could travel throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire, everyone was hearing the news of his greatness” (See: Personification)

מָרְדֳּכַ֖י הוֹלֵ֥ךְ וְ⁠גָדֽוֹל

This expression means that Mordecai continued to become more powerful and influential. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was becoming more famous because the king was giving him more and more power” (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:5

וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב

After the information about Mordecai, the story now returns to tell what happened on the appointed day. You could add a phrase to show this. Alternate translation, add: “on the day when they were allowed to defend themselves”

וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב

This expression means that the Jews defended themselves against their enemies, even to the point of killing people who attacked them. Alternate translation: “the Jews attacked all of their enemies and killed them with their swords” (See: Idiom)

מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב

Swords were not necessarily the only weapons the Jews had and used. The sword is used to represent all of their weaponry. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this more general meaning. Alternate translation: “the Jews took up their weapons and used them against their enemies” (See: Synecdoche)

וְ⁠הֶ֖רֶג וְ⁠אַבְדָ֑ן

These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they destroyed them completely” (See: Doublet)

וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֥וּ בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ⁠רְצוֹנָֽ⁠ם

This expression does not mean that the Jews felt pleasure when they killed their enemies. Rather, it means that the Jews were able to defend themselves against their enemies and were not hindered in any way. Alternate translation: “they were able to do everything they wanted to do against their enemies” (See: Idiom)

בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם

This is an idiom that describes enemies. (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:6

וּ⁠בְ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֗ה

Alternate translation: “just in Susa, the capital city”

הָרְג֤וּ…וְ⁠אַבֵּ֔ד

These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: Doublet)

חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִֽישׁ

Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: Numbers)

Esther 9:7

פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא…דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן…אַסְפָּֽתָא

The story lists the names of Haman’s sons before explaining that they were his sons and that the Jews killed them. To be clear who these people are, you can add this information from verse 10 explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “rhe Jews killed the ten sons of their enemy Haman son of Hammedatha. The names of his sons were…” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא…דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן…אַסְפָּֽתָא

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Esther 9:8

פּוֹרָ֛תָא…אֲדַלְיָ֖א…אֲרִידָֽתָא

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Esther 9:9

פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙…אֲרִיסַ֔י…אֲרִדַ֖י…וַיְזָֽתָא

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Esther 9:10

עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י

Alternate translation: “the 10 sons” (See: Numbers)

צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים

This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם

Here the expression to stretch out a hand means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take” (See: Idiom)

וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה

Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”

Esther 9:11

בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא

Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”

בָּ֣א מִסְפַּ֧ר…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here the story speaks about the report as if it were a living thing that could come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “one of the king’s servants told the king the number of” (See: Personification)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ

Here, face figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase likely means that someone came into the king’s presence in order to deliver this report. Alternate translation: “someone came in and reported to the king” (See: Metonymy)

מִסְפַּ֧ר הַֽ⁠הֲרוּגִ֛ים

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “how many people the Jews had killed” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 9:12

הָרְגוּ֩…וְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד

These terms mean the same thing and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: Doublet)

חֲמֵ֧שׁ מֵא֣וֹת אִ֗ישׁ

Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: Numbers)

וְ⁠אֵת֙

Alternate translation: “including”

עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת בְּנֵֽי

Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: Numbers)

בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר מְדִינ֥וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מֶ֣ה עָשׂ֑וּ

The king is making a statement, but he uses a question form to show that he is very convinced that the Jews must have also killed many people in the other provinces. Alternate translation: “what they must have done in the rest of the king’s provinces” or “they must have killed many more in the rest of the king’s provinces” (See: Rhetorical Question)

וּ⁠מַה־שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ ע֖וֹד וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

These two statements mean basically the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther what she wants. If it would be confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “is there anything more that you want? Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: Parallelism)

וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ

You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. You can also say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will do it for you” (See: Active or Passive)

שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ

The two abstract nouns petition and request can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “anything more that you want” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Esther 9:13

אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב

This is an idiom that has been used many times in the story. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: Idiom)

יִנָּתֵ֣ן

You can say this with an active form, and you can indicate that Esther is asking the king to do it. Alternate translation: “please allow” (See: Active or Passive)

גַּם־מָחָ֗ר לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כְּ⁠דָ֣ת הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם

Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live in Susa to obey today’s decree tomorrow also” or “to do tomorrow also what was decreed that they should do today”

בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן

Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”

עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ

The request is not for the king to allow the bodies to be impaled (or hanged), but instead, for the king to order this. Alternate translation: “and have the bodies of Haman’s ten sons hanged [or impaled]”

עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ

The purpose of this would not be to kill the sons, since they are already dead, but to demonstrate publicly that the enemies of the Jews had been completely defeated. (See: Symbolic Action)

עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ

It is implicit that since Haman’s sons are already dead, what Esther is actually asking for is for their bodies to be impaled or hanged. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי

Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: Numbers)

הָ⁠עֵֽץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 9:14

וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠הֵֽעָשׂ֣וֹת כֵּ֔ן

You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king granted both of Esther’s requests” (See: Active or Passive)

וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן

This phrase, “in Susa,” seems to indicate that this refers to Esther’s first request. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he issued a decree allowing the Jews in Susa to fight against their enemies again the next day” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן

This can be stated in active form as in the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן

Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”

תָּלֽוּ

This was Esther’s second request. You can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he ordered his servants to hang [or impale] the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי

Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: Numbers)

Esther 9:15

בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן

Alternate translation: “who lived in the capital city of Susa”

וַ⁠יִּֽקָּהֲל֞וּ

Alternate translation: “joined together”

בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙

Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר

Adar is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in 3:7, 3:13, 8:12, and 9:1. (See: Hebrew Months)

בְ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן

Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”

שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִ֑ישׁ

Alternate translation: “three hundred men” (See: Numbers)

וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם

Here, the expression to stretch out a hand means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:16

נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם

Here, standing is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. See how you translated this in 8:11. Alternate translation: “joined together to fight back against their enemies” (See: Metaphor)

נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם

It’s implicit here, and stated explicitly in the next verse, that these other Jews fought their enemies only on the thirteenth day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “on the thirteenth day of the month of Adar” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠נ֨וֹחַ֙ מֵ⁠אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם

Here, resting is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they had no more trouble from their enemies” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠הָרֹג֙ בְּ⁠שֹׂ֣נְאֵי⁠הֶ֔ם חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף

Alternate translation: “and killed 75,000 of them”

חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף

Alternate translation: “seventy-five thousand” (See: Numbers)

לֹ֥א שָֽׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם

Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” or “they did not take the valuable things” or “the did not take their possessions”

Esther 9:17

בְּ⁠יוֹם־שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר

Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר

Adar is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in 3:7, 3:13, 8:12, 9:1, and 9:15. (See: Hebrew Months)

בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה

Alternate translation: “they devoted the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar, to joyful celebration” or “they feasted joyfully the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar”

בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word rejoicing tells how they celebrated. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” (See: Hendiadys)

מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה

This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations. (See: Synecdoche)

Esther 9:18

וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙

Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”

נִקְהֲלוּ֙

The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “on day 13” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “and on day 14” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

וְ⁠נ֗וֹחַ בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה

Resting is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration” (See: Metaphor)

בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “on day 15” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה

This phrase means the same thing as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for feasting joyfully” (See: Hendiadys)

Esther 9:19

עַל־כֵּ֞ן

This term introduces the result of the events that were described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֣ים הַפְּרָזִ֗ים הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִים֮ בְּ⁠עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠פְּרָזוֹת֒

These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to make the identification of this group clear. The first phrase means that they lived in rural areas. The second phrase means they lived in settlements that did not have walls around them, that is, in villages. You can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Jews who live in villages in the countryside” (See: Parallelism)

עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙…וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

The implication is that this explanation is being offered for the benefit of city-dwelling Jews who might wonder why rural Jews celebrate this holiday on a different day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “rather than on the fifteenth day.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙…וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

Alternate translation: “observe this holiday on the fourteenth day”

י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙

Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר

Adar is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in 3:7, 3:13, 8:12, 9:1, 9:15 and 9:17. (See: Hebrew Months)

שִׂמְחָ֥ה וּ⁠מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה

As in verses 17 and 18, this means “by celebrating joyfully” (See: Hendiadys)

וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. (See: Idiom)

וּ⁠מִשְׁל֥וֹחַ מָנ֖וֹת אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ

Giving gifts, in this culture as in many cultures, was a way of acknowledging a special occasion. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another” (See: Symbolic Action)

אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ

Here, a man means “a person.” The term friend would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:20

וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב…הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה

Alternate translation: “wrote an account of all of these events”

כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינוֹת֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ

Alternate translation: “all the Jews everywhere in the kingdom”

הַ⁠קְּרוֹבִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רְחוֹקִֽים

This is a figurative way of referring to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. This expression means the Jews who lived in or near Susa, those who lived far away, and all Jews in between. Alternate translation: “everywhere they lived” (See: Merism)

Esther 9:21

לְ⁠קַיֵּם֮ עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֒ לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים

Here, to set up means to establish, and to make a day means to observe it as a holiday. Alternate translation: “to establish … as a holiday” (See: Idiom)

י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙

Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר

Adar is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in 3:7, 3:13, 8:12, 9:1, 9:15, 9:17, and 9:19. (See: Hebrew Months)

יוֹם־חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ

Alternate translation: “the fifteenth day” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה

This expression means “every year.” Alternation translation: “each year” (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:22

כַּ⁠יָּמִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר

This verse gives the reason for what Mordecai told the Jews to do in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because those were the days when” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

נָ֨חוּ בָ⁠הֶ֤ם הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מֵ⁠א֣וֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם

As in verses 16, 17, and 18, resting here is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “the Jews stopped fighting because they had defeated their enemies” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ אֲשֶׁר֩

Alternate translation: “And that was the month when”

נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how dramatic and wonderful the change was. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and say something like “after being very sad, they became very happy.” Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sorrowful and crying to being very joyful and celebrating” (See: Parallelism)

נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב

It is implicit that the Jews were deeply distressed because they were being threatened with destruction, and they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that here. Alternate translation: “everything had changed for them. They had been deeply distressed because they were threatened with destruction. But they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה

Turning figuratively represents changing. Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sad to being joyful” (See: Metaphor)

מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה

The abstract nouns sorrow and joy can be expressed with adjectives such as “distressed” and “happy.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

לַ⁠עֲשׂ֣וֹת אוֹתָ֗⁠ם יְמֵי֙

These are things that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that here. Alternate translation: “so Mordecai told them to observe those days with” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה

As in verses 17, 18, and 19, this phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word “rejoicing” tells how the celebrating was to be done. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” or “feasting joyfully” (See: Hendiadys)

וּ⁠מִשְׁל֤וֹחַ מָנוֹת֙ אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ

See how you translated this in verse 19. Review the notes there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”

אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ

Here, a man means “a person.” The term friend would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: Idiom)

וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים

In this culture as in many others, helping the poor was also a way of acknowledging a special occasion. The idea was that no one should miss out on the benefits of the wonderful thing that God had done. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should help the poor on those days” (See: Symbolic Action)

וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים

This is also something that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that here. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should give gifts to the poor on those days” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Esther 9:23

וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙…אֲשֶׁר־כָּתַ֥ב מָרְדֳּכַ֖י אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

The implication seems to be that the Jews were glad to do what Mordecai had instructed, because they had already been doing it. You can add a word such as “readily” to indicate this. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙

Alternate translation: “agreed”

אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת

You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way” (See: Order of Events)

Esther 9:24

כִּי֩

This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

כִּי֩

If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים

This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם

Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”

וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל

You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל

As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)” (See: How to Translate Names)

לְ⁠הֻמָּ֖⁠ם וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם

The terms vex and destroy mean basically the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the degree to which Haman’s deadly plans were distressing to the Jews. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can combine the terms and express the emphasis with a word like “completely.” Alternate translation: “and completely destroy them” (See: Hendiadys)

Esther 9:25

וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹאָ⁠הּ֮ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒

In this summary, many details are communicated implicitly. She means Esther. Also, this verse continues the account of what this celebration is commemorating. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can make these things explicit. Alternate translation: “the celebration also commemorated how Esther dared to come into the king’s presence without being summoned, and she won his favor” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒

Here, face is a metonym meaning the presence of a person. This phrase means that Esther came into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into the king’s presence” or “before the king” (See: Metonymy)

אָמַ֣ר עִם־הַ⁠סֵּ֔פֶר

Once again, there is much information that is implicit here. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the king gave Mordecai the authority to send a letter throughout the empire saying that the Jews could defend themselves against their enemies” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

יָשׁ֞וּב מַחֲשַׁבְתּ֧⁠וֹ הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה אֲשֶׁר־חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עַל־רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ

His, he, and him in this sentence refer to Haman. Return on his head is an idiom that means that what a person was planning to do to someone else happened to that person instead. Use an idiom with that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “the wicked plan that Haman developed against the Jews will be done to him” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠תָל֥וּ אֹת֛⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנָ֖י⁠ו עַל־הָ⁠עֵֽץ

The letter itself did not say this. The story is summarizing the events in compressed form. It is speaking of the letter as if it were a person who could take action and give commands like this, but it was the king who gave the command. Alternate translation: “the king also ordered his servants to hang [or impale] Haman on a wooden pole [or hang Haman on a gallows]. When the Jews in Susa killed his ten sons, the king had their bodies hanged [or impaled] as well” (See: Personification)

הָ⁠עֵֽץ

See how you translated this in 2:23. Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Esther 9:26

עַל־כֵּ֡ן

This introduces the reason why the Jews gave the name “Purim” to this celebration. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

קָֽרְאוּ֩ לַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֤לֶּה פוּרִים֙

They means the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jews called these days Purim, like the word Pur” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

פוּרִים֙

This is the name of the festival that commemorates the salvation of the Jewish people in ancient Persia from Haman’s plot to destroy and kill all the Jews in a single day. (See: How to Translate Names)

עַל־שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר

This is information that the original audience needed to understand how this celebration got its name. You can put this first in the verse because it explains what comes next. Alternate translation: “the Persian word for ‘lot’ is ‘Pur’” (See: Background Information)

שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר

It can be stated clearly what “Pur” means. Alternate translation: “the word Pur, which means ‘lot’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עַל־כֵּ֕ן

The story has just given the reason why the holiday is called Purim. Now it is going to give another reason. It will be explaining why the Jews added this holiday to their calendar, in addition to the festivals that were commanded in the Law of Moses. The next verse describes them adding the holiday. This verse gives the reasons why they did that. Alternate translation: “because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

עַל־כָּל־דִּבְרֵ֖י הָ⁠אִגֶּ֣רֶת הַ⁠זֹּ֑את

This is a reference to the letter that Mordecai wrote, as described in verses 20–22. Alternate translation: “because Mordecai wrote to them to tell them to observe this holiday”

וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize what a vivid experience it was to live through the events that this story describes. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “amazing.” Alternate translation: “the amazing things that had happened to them” (See: Parallelism)

וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

These phrases say generally “this” and “what,” but they are referring to the specific events the story has related. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can describe these things specifically. Alternate translation: “because the Jews had been able to destroy the enemies who had wanted to destroy them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

You can put this first, before the information about Mordecai’s letter, because it happened first. You can say “then” when you tell about the letter. (See: Order of Events)

וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם

This expression means “what had happened to them.” (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:27

קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ ׀ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֨ם ׀ וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם וְ⁠עַ֨ל כָּל־הַ⁠נִּלְוִ֤ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙…לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה

Alternate translation: “the Jews said that they would tell their descendants and those people who became Jews to be certain to celebrate this festival”

קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩

“Set up” and “accepted” mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews definitely agreed to do this. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “agreed to establish” (See: Doublet)

וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם

As in 6:13, seed is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֔וֹר

This expression means that the Jews would never stop celebrating the feast of Purim every year. You can put this last since it applies to the whole verse. Alternate translation: “always” or “forever” (See: Idiom)

לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה

To present things in chronological order, you can put this before the reference to Jewish descendants and converts to Judaism. Alternate translation: “to establish those two days as holidays and to observe them” (See: Order of Events)

כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם

Alternate translation: “in the way that Mordecai had told them to do in the letter”

וְ⁠כִ⁠זְמַנָּ֑⁠ם

This means the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar, as specified in 9:21. Alternate translation: “on those exact days of the month of Adar”

בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה

This expression means “each and every year.” Alternate translation: “every single year” (See: Idiom)

Esther 9:28

וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים

This gives the result of the reasons described in verses 26 and 27. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “that is why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים

Remembered and made mean basically the same thing here. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews have been faithful in doing this. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “So the Jews have celebrated these days.” Alternate translation: “therefore they said that they would remember and celebrate on those two days” (See: Doublet)

וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים

This expression uses two passive forms, but you could say the same thing using active forms. Alternate translation: “so the Jews have celebrated and observed these days” (See: Active or Passive)

בְּ⁠כָל־דּ֣וֹר וָ⁠ד֗וֹר

This expression means “in each and every generation.” Alternate translation: “in every single generation” (See: Idiom)

מִשְׁפָּחָה֙ וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּחָ֔ה

This expression means “every family.” Alternate translation: “every Jewish family” (See: Idiom)

מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר

This could be a figure of speech that refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. Generally speaking, a province would be the largest division of the empire that would identify a person’s location, and a city would be the smallest. Particularly, since the Jews would continue to celebrate Purim after the Persian empire and its provinces no longer exist, you might choose to express the meaning of this figure of speech in a more general way. Alternate translation: “everywhere they have lived” (See: Merism)

מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה

This expression means “every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: Idiom)

וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר

This expression means “every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: Idiom)

וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם

As in verse 27, this expression means that the Jews will never stop celebrating the feast of Purim. You can say this positively. Alternate translation: “will always observe the Festival of Purim faithfully” (See: Double Negatives)

וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם

These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews will definitely not stop celebrating Purim each year. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “definitely” or “certainly” or “always.” Alternate translation: “the Jews and their descendants will certainly always continue to celebrate this festival of Purim” (See: Parallelism)

מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים

Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”

וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף

Alternate translation: “will always observe”

מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם

As in verse 27, seed is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 9:29

בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל

This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

אֲבִיחַ֛יִל

This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in 2:15. (See: How to Translate Names)

וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י

Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of Mordecai here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”

הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י

This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

וַ֠⁠תִּכְתֹּב…אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף

Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”

לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית

This second letter of Purim could refer to: (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (see verses 20-22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written. (See: Numbers)

Esther 9:30

וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים

While this says “he,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

אֶל־כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֶל־שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה מַלְכ֖וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ

These three phrases all mean the same thing. The repetition emphasizes that Esther and Mordecai sent this second letter out comprehensively throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “to all the Jews throughout the entire empire of Ahasuerus” (See: Parallelism)

שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה

The letter was not sent to the provinces as geographical territories, but to the Jews who lived in them. The Jews are being described by something associated with them, the places where they lived. (See: Metonymy)

שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה

Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: Numbers)

דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת

The abstract nouns peace and truth can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת

The Hebrew word translated as truth here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”

Esther 9:31

לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה

Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”

הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙

This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם

This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in 2:6.) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.

וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם

Here, seed is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: Metaphor)

Esther 9:32

וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it” (See: Active or Passive)

Esther 10

Esther 10 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Mordecai’s new position

Through the power of Yahweh, Mordecai was given a new position in the Persian Empire. Mordecai was now the second in command in the kingdom of Persia and he used his position to help other Jews.

Esther 10:1

וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֧וֹשׁ

This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way to introduce a new event in your language. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩…מַ֛ס

Alternate translation: “Then … levied a tax”

עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם

The purpose of this chapter is to describe the greatness of Mordecai. It does that by showing that he was second in command to a very powerful emperor. Referring to both the land and the sea is a way to include everything that lives in a very large area of the earth. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “everyone throughout his empire.” Alternate translation: “on all the people in the empire … even the people who lived on the islands in the Mediterranean Sea” or “on everyone throughout the land and even the far-away islands” (See: Merism)

וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם

The phrase the islands of the sea likely refers to the fact that the Persian kings had conquered territories reaching all the way to the Mediterranean Sea. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which reached all the way to the Mediterranean Sea.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם

These geographic features were not expected to pay the tax. The land and coastlands represent the people living there. The story is describing those people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the places where they live. (See: Metonymy)

Esther 10:2

וְ⁠כָל־מַעֲשֵׂ֤ה תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ

Power and might mean essentially the same thing. They are used together to emphasize how powerful King Ahasuerus was. If it is more natural in your language, you can use one word with that meaning, with another word that gives it emphasis. Alternate translation: “all that he achieved because of how very powerful he was” or “all the great things that he did because of his great power” (See: Doublet)

תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ

The abstract nouns power and might can be translated with an adjective. See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

וּ⁠פָרָשַׁת֙

Alternate translation: “They also wrote a full account”

גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י

Alternate translation: “of how important Mordecai was” or “of how the king had honored Mordecai for the great things he had done”

גִּדְּל֖⁠וֹ

See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”

הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס

This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST. (See: Rhetorical Question)

הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים

You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record…” (See: Active or Passive)

הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים

Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse If your readers would misunderstand this.

סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס

See how you translated this in 2:23. Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: Idiom)

Esther 10:3

כִּ֣י

This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י

This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ

Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”

וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים

Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”

אֶחָ֑י⁠ו

Here, brothers is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ

These two phrases basically mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard Mordecai worked for the good of his people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “He worked hard so his people and their descendants would prosper.” (See: Parallelism)

דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ

The abstract nouns good and peace refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ

Seeking is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: Metaphor)

וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ

Speaking peace is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: Idiom)

לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ

Here, seed figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: Metaphor)